2017 Jeep Renegade Owner`s Manual

2017 Renegade
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
2017
17BU-126-AC
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
OWNER’S MANUAL
Third Edition
Printed in the U.S.A.
Renegade
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
4
5
SAFETY
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
5
6
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
6
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
7
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
8
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
9
10
MULTIMEDIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
10
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
11
12
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
12
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
▫ Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . . .7
▫ Essential Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
1
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship,
distinctive styling, and high quality.
The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed
for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving
or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel
drive vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s
Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission,
and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles
on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve
with experience. When driving off-road, or working the
vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle, or expect the vehicle to
overcome the natural laws of physics.
Always observe federal, state, provincial, and local laws
wherever you drive.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision.
Refer to “Driving Tips” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read
these publications carefully. Following the instructions and
recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your Jeep® vehicle best, has factory-trained
technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many
passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe
manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the
INTRODUCTION
higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it
may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a
collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury.
Drive carefully.
5
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided
is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the U.S.
government notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more
each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat
belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Rollover Warning Label
1
6 INTRODUCTION
Symbols
Consult the following table for a description of the symbols
that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this
Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
7
1
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
CONTENTS
䡵 FRONT VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
䡵 REAR VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
䡵 INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
FRONT VIEW
Front View
1 — Headlights
2 — Engine Compartment
3 — Windshield
4 — Doors
5 — Exterior Mirrors
6 — Wheels
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 11
REAR VIEW
2
Rear View
1 — Rear Lights
2 — Rear Windshield Wiper
3 — Liftgate
12 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Air Vents
2 — Instrument Cluster
3 — Windshield Wiper Lever
4 — Hand Grip
5 — Glove Compartment
6 — Steering Wheel
7 — Multifunction Lever
8 — Headlight Switch
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 13
INTERIOR
2
Interior Features
1 — Power Window Switches
2 — Uconnect Radio
3 — Switch Panel
4 — Climate Controls
7 — Seats
5 — Selec-Terrain Mode Knob — If Equipped
6 — Transmission Gear Selector (Automatic/
Manual options)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Key Fob With Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
䡵 IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Models With Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer Activation
— If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . .26
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped . . . .26
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ How To Use Remote Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .30
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . . .28
▫ Disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
䡵 DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
3
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Dead Lock Device — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .39
▫ Child Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Manual Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Power Adjustment (Front) — If Equipped . . . . . .42
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
䡵 HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
▫ Front Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
▫ Auto Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .52
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
▫ Folding Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
䡵 EXTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped . .56
▫ High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
▫ Automatic Lighting — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .57
▫ Rear Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
䡵 STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
▫ Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .51
▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped. . . . . . . . .51
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
䡵 INTERIOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Internal Compartment Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
▫ Cargo Area Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
䡵 WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Front Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Rear Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped . . . . . .68
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
▫ Air Outlet And Diffuser Locations — Passenger
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
▫ Auto-Up Feature With Auto-Reverse Protection — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
▫ Reset Auto-Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
䡵 MY SKY SUN ROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .89
▫ Removable Roof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
▫ Power My Sky — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
▫ Removing And Installing Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
▫ Bag For Housing Panels — If Equipped . . . . . . . .97
▫ Emergency Open/Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
▫ Manual Climate Controls Overview. . . . . . . . . . .71
䡵 HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
▫ Automatic Climate Control Overview . . . . . . . . .76
▫ To Open The Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
▫ To Close The Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
▫ Power Window Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
▫ Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
▫ Auto-Down Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
▫ Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
3
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
▫ Ashtray — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
䡵 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Front Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ Handle Grip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .122
▫ Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
▫ Cigar Lighter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
KEYS
Key Fobs
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The ignition
system consists of a key fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) and a START/STOP push button ignition system.
The Remote Keyless Entry system consists of a key fob and
Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if equipped.
3
NOTE: The key fob may not be found if it is located next to
a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these
devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal.
Key Fob With Remote Control
The key fob with Remote Control contains a Remote
Keyless Entry feature. The Remote Keyless Entry system
allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or
activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a handheld key fob. The key fob
does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
Keyless Ignition Key Fob
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will be activated.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlock Button
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the unlock
button on the key fob. To change the current setting, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Key Fob Emergency Key Release
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push the interior door unlock button on the door panel.
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door or twice within five seconds to
unlock all doors and the liftgate.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push of
the unlock button. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer
to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in
“Doors” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors and liftgate.
The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to
acknowledge the signal. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
located in “Multimedia” for further programmable information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in “Doors”
in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive
Entry
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is open, the
doors will lock. The doors will unlock again automatically
if the key is left inside the passenger compartment, otherwise the doors will stay locked.
3
Replacing The Battery In The Key With Remote
Control
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for further information.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your
thumb and then pull the emergency key out with your
other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Separate the key fob halves using the tip of the emergency key, a #2 flat blade screwdriver, or a coin and
gently pry the two halves of the key fob apart. Make
sure not to damage the seal during removal.
Separating Case With A Coin
Emergency Key Removal
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an authorized dealer.
Request For Additional Key Fobs
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
WARNING!
Key Fob Battery Replacement
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, and then replace
the battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves
together.
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• Always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
mode.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
dealer.
3
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
NOTE: If the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead
battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite
of the emergency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE
START/STOP button and push to operate the ignition
switch.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Models With Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The push button ignition has three operating positions. The
three positions are OFF, ON, and RUN.
START/STOP Ignition Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
positions:
OFF
• The engine is stopped.
• No electrical devices are available.
ON
• The vehicle is not running.
• Some electrical devices are available
RUN
• Driving position.
• All the electrical devices are available.
NOTE: The vehicle will not start if the key fob is located
inside the cargo area and the liftgate is opened.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE: For further information, refer to ⬙Starting The
Engine,⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating.⬙
3
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
• Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 328ft (100m).
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range.
Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the instrument
cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote
start prematurely:
• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position.
How To Use Remote Start
• Push Remote Start button on the key fob twice within
five seconds. Pushing the Remote Start button a third
time shuts the engine off.
• To drive the vehicle, push unlock button, insert the key
in the ignition and turn to the ON/RUN position.
• With remote start, the engine will only run for 15
minutes (timeout) unless the ignition key is placed in the
ON/RUN position.
• The vehicle must be started with the key after two
consecutive timeouts.
• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
• Gear Selector in PARK
• Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
• Doors closed
• Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury
or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the
turn signals will flash twice, and the horn will chirp twice.
Then the engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in
the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window operation is disabled when
the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position before you
can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the remote start button one time or allow
the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system will
disable the one time push of the remote start button for two
seconds after receiving a valid remote start request.
3
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock
the vehicle using Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via
the door handles, and disarm the vehicle security alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
push and release the START/STOP button.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless EnterN-Go — Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will display in the instrument
cluster display until you push the ignition START button.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, the heated steering wheel
and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on
in cold weather. These features will stay on through the
duration of Remote Start or until the ignition switch is
cycled to the RUN position.
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer Activation
— If Equipped
When remote start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 40°F (4.4°C), the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer will be enabled. Exiting remote start will resume
previous operation, except if the Windshield Wiper De-Icer
is active. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and operation will continue.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does
not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid key
fob is used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will
shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid key fob is
used to start the engine.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position,
the vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for
a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to start the
engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than ten seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this
occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Customer Key Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
3
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming
a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition for
unauthorized operation. While the vehicle security alarm is
armed, interior switches for door locks and liftgate release
are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle
security alarm will provide the following audible and
visible signals:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.
• The horn will pulse
General Information
• The vehicle security light in the instrument cluster will
flash
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
• The turn signals will flash
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the “OFF”
mode.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push the lock button on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Doors⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know
Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
NOTE:
3. If any doors are open, close them.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the passive entry door handle to unlock the door,
refer to ⬙Doors⬙ in ⬙Getting To Know Your Vehicle⬙ for
further information.
• Cycle the ignition out of the off mode to disarm the
system.
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button on
the key fob cannot arm or disarm the vehicle security
alarm.
• The vehicle security alarm remains armed during power
liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate button will not disarm
the vehicle security alarm. If someone enters the vehicle
through the liftgate and opens any door, the alarm will
sound.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
3
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior
lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
Disabling
To completely disable the alarm (e.g. in the case of long
inactivity of the car), lock the doors by turning the vehicle
key in the exterior door lock cylinder.
Locking/Unlocking Doors From Outside
With the doors closed, insert the key blade into the driver
exterior door lock cylinder and turn to the right to lock the
driver’s door.
To unlock the driver’s door, insert the key blade into the
driver exterior door lock cylinder and turn to the left to
unlock the driver’s door.
NOTE: If the batteries in the key fob discharge in the event
of a failure to the system or to switch off the alarm, place
the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
DOORS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, rotate the door lock button on each door
trim panel forward. To unlock the doors, pull the inside
door handle to the first detent or rotate the door lock
button until the lock symbol is no longer visible.
If the lock symbol is visible when the door is shut, the door
will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
Manual Door Lock
NOTE: The manual lock knob unlocks each individual
door separately.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Always make
sure the ignition is in “OFF” mode, remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries or death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is located on each of the front
door trim panels. Use this switch to lock or unlock the
doors, liftgate and fuel door.
NOTE: The key fob may not be able to be detected by the
vehicle keyless-go system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
keyless-go system from starting the vehicle.
Power Door Lock Switch
3
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry system if equipped. refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” located in “Doors” of
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry — If
Equipped
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless
Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock
or unlock buttons.
• The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle
keyless-go system if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop or other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
keyless-go system from starting the vehicle.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
driver’s door handle, grab the front driver door handle to
unlock the driver’s door automatically.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry can be enabled or disabled. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the
unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower
response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door
Handle, and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and if equipped, the security alarm
will arm.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s
door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push
the door handle lock button to lock all four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door
handle to unlock all four doors and the liftgate automatically.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press”
or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
3
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key
Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with Passive Entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search
in any Passive Entry vehicle:
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE: The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
key fob battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the lock
button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob
while a door is open.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door handle
while a door is open.
3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors are
shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it finds a
Passive Entry key fob inside the car, and it does not find
any Passive Entry key fobs outside the car, then the car will
unlock and alert the customer.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle, and no
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected outside the vehicle.
The vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the
following conditions are met:
To Lock The Liftgate
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
NOTE:
• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the vehicle
and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive Entry door
handle.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the
electronic liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Electronic
Liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock button located to the
right of electronic liftgate release.
• The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock the
liftgate and the doors. The liftgate unlock feature is built
into the Electronic Liftgate release.
• If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in the
instrument cluster display, if equipped, only the liftgate
will unlock when you push the Electronic Release. If
⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st Press⬙ is programmed in
Uconnect, the liftgate will unlock when you push the
electronic unlock/lock button on the liftgate. For further
information, refer to “Uconnect Touch Settings” in
“Multimedia.”
3
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Liftgate Release/Passive Entry
Emergency Key Release
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release
2 — Liftgate Passive Lock Location
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
Emergency Unlocking Driver Door
NOTE: The Emergency Key can be inserted into the door
lock cylinder from either direction.
If the key fob battery is low or dead, the emergency key can
be used to unlock the driver side door lock cylinder.
To release the emergency key, proceed as follows:
1. Slide the emergency key release button to the side.
2. Remove the emergency key from the key fob with
Remote Control housing.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
WARNING! (Continued)
of reasons. A child or others could be severely
injured or killed. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal, or the gear
selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A
child could start the vehicle, operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause them to be severely injured or killed
Dead Lock Device — If Equipped
The Dead Lock Device is a safety device that prevents the
use of the internal door handles of the vehicle and the
power door lock switch.
This device prevents the doors from opening within the
passenger compartment.
Arming The Dead Lock Device
• The device works on all doors and requires two presses
of the lock button on the key fob.
• The arming of the device is indicated by three flashes of
the direction indicators.
• The device does not operate if one or more doors are not
properly closed.
Disarming The Device
• The device will automatically disarm by pushing the
unlock button on the key fob.
• Placing the ignition in the ON or RUN position.
Child Locks
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a ChildProtection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or ignition key) and rotate the dial to the lock
or unlock position. When the system on a door is engaged,
that door can only be opened by using the outside door
handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position.
3
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it is
in the desired position.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, rotate the
lock/unlock dial to the unlocked position, roll down the
window, and open the door with the outside door
handle.
WARNING!
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
NOTE:
• When the child lock system is engaged, the door can
only be opened by using the outside door handle even
though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
• After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain
it is in the desired position.
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
SEATS
Manual Front Seats
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
3
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Manual Seat Adjustment Levers
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar
2 — Seat Height Adjustment Lever
3 — Recline Lever
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
(Continued)
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting bar
is located at the front of the seats, near the floor. While
sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the seat
forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the
seat adjusters have latched.
Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull
upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Manual Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the outboard
side of the seat, lean back to the desired position and
release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever, lean
forward and release the lever.
Power Adjustment (Front) — If Equipped
The power seat controls are located on the outboard side of
the seat, close to the floor.
Use the switch to move the seat up/down, forward/
rearward, tilt (if equipped) and to set the angle of the
seatback.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down.
Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat
switch. The front of the seat cushion will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Recline Switch
3 — Power Lumbar Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push
the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
3
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Power Lumbar Adjustment— If Equipped
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or
downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
NOTE: Power seat adjustments are only allowed when the
ignition device is turned to ON, and for about 30 minutes
after it is turned to OFF. The seats can also be moved after
opening/closing the doors for about 30 minutes, locking or
unlocking the doors, or switching on of the front courtesy
lights.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The heated seat switches are located on the instrument
panel.
You can choose between two heating levels:
• Push the heated seat button
setting on.
once to turn the HI
• Push the heated seat button
the LO setting on.
a second time to turn
• Push the heated seat button
heating elements off.
a third time to turn the
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 145 minutes of
continuous operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting
will turn off automatically after approximately 60 minutes.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
In vehicles equipped with Auto On Comfort, when turning
on the vehicle the driver’s heated seat will automatically
turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Rear Seats
Split Rear Seats
The split rear seat has the ability to fold flat which increases
the storage of the rear cargo area.
NOTE:
• Prior to folding the rear seat down, it may be necessary
to position the front seat to its mid-track position. Be
sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned
forward, this will allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
• Prior to folding the rear seat, you must secure the rear
armrest in up position.
• You may experience deformation in the seat cushion
from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by
simply opening the seats to the open position, over time
the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
(Continued)
3
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Partial Enlargement Of The Cargo Area
Enlargement of the left side of the cargo area allows you to
carry a single passenger on the right side of the rear seat,
while the enlargement of the right side allows you to carry
two passengers.
Proceed as follows:
Rear Seat Release
1 — Seatback Release Lever
2 — Seat Belt Guide
1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped). Refer to “Removable Rear Shelf” in “Cargo Area Features” for details.
Cargo Area Enlargement
2. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.
Folding both sides of the rear seat provides additional
storage in the rear cargo area.
3. Move the safety belts to the outboard side of the seat
and rest them on the seat belt guide.
Proceed as follows:
4. Pull the seatback release lever to fold the left or right
rear seatback completely forward.
1. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.
2. Move the safety belts to the outboard side of the seat.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
3. Pull the seatback release lever to fold both sides of the
rear seatbacks completely forward.
Seatback Repositioning
NOTE: If interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position.
3
1. Move the safety belts to the seat belt guides on the top
edge of the seat to ensure the seatbacks properly latch.
2. Lift the seatbacks, pushing them back until they lock on
both the latches. Verify the red notches are no longer
visible on the release lever. If the red notches are visible,
the seatback is not secure.
Rear Seat Latch
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Unfolding The Rear Armrest 40/20/40
Tilt the head restraint forward and pull the rear armrest tab
to release it from the seat and pull forward.
Rear Armrest
Rear Seat Center Armrest — If Equipped
The center part of the rear seat can also be used as rear
armrest with cupholders.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
3
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Front Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with front driver and passenger
head restraints.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized
dealer.
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button,
located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
Rear Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with two outboard head restraints
and one center head restraint for its rear passengers. The
rear head restraints can be raised or lowered. When the
center seat is being occupied, the head restraint should be
in the raised position. When there are no occupants in the
center seat, the head restraint can be lowered for maximum
visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint.
Adjustment Button
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized
dealer.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below
the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
To lock the steering column in position, pull the tilt/
telescoping lever upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
Tilt Steering Wheel Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the tilt/telescoping
lever downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or downward as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired.
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
has been turned on, it will stay
steering wheel switch
on for an average of 80 minutes or more before automatically shutting off. This time will vary based on
environmental temperatures. The heated steering wheel
can shut off early or may not turn on when the steering
wheel is already warm. The heated steering wheel
control button is located on the center of the instrument
panel below the radio screen.
3
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
In vehicles equipped with Auto On Comfort, when turning
on the vehicle the heated steering wheel will automatically
turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).
can be reduced by moving the lever under the mirror to the
night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the lever under the mirror is set
in the day position (toward the windshield).
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
The mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right. The
mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through
the rear window. Headlight glare from vehicles behind you
Mirror Adjustment
NOTE: The mirror will automatically release in the event
of heavy contact with a passenger.
Auto Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by
pushing the button at the base of the mirror. A light to the
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right of the
button does not illuminate.
To adjust the mirror, push the mirror adjustment switch in
the four directions indicated by arrows.
NOTE:
• To adjust the power mirrors, the ignition must be in the
RUN position.
• Once the mirror is adjusted, rotate the control to the
neutral position to avoid accidental movements.
Dimming Mirror
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving
in REVERSE.
Outside Mirrors
Power Adjustment Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
panel.
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Selector Switch
2 — Mirror Adjustment Switch
3
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Adjustment Mirrors — If Equipped
Folding Mirror
To adjust the exterior mirrors, push the corners of the
mirrors till desired alignment is obtained.
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to pivot
forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The mirror has
three detent positions: full forward, normal and full rearward.
Manual Adjustment Mirror
Folding Exterior Mirror
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
Rear Window Defroster.
3
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlights
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights, side marker lights, daytime running
lights, fog lights and the dimming of the instrument cluster
and interior lighting.
Headlight Switch
1
2
3
4
— Rotate Headlight Switch
— Ambient Light Dimmer
— Instrument Panel Dimmer
— Push Fog Light Switch
Turning on the headlights will illuminate the instrument
cluster and the controls located on the instrument panel.
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn on when the
engine is started and remain on unless the headlights are
turned on or the engine is shut off.
The DRLs will be disabled during turn signal operation
and resume operation when the turn signal operation has
ended.
High Beams
To turn on the high beam headlights, push the turn signal
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) and an
indicator will illuminate in the cluster. To turn off the high
beams, pull the turn signal lever rearward (toward the rear
of the vehicle).
High Beam And Turn Signal Controls
NOTE: The headlights must be on for the high beams to
activate.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and
remain on until the lever is released.
Automatic Lighting — If Equipped
Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO position.
When the automatic headlights are enabled, the headlight
time delay is active. After the ignition is placed in the OFF
position, the headlights will automatically turn off after the
time is set by Uconnect Settings.
Refer to “Headlight Delay” in this section for more information.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
Light Sensor
The light sensor is equipped with an infrared LED, located
on the windshield. It detects changes in light intensity
outside the vehicle, based on the sensitivity of light set by
using the menu on the display or on the Uconnect system.
The higher the sensitivity, the lesser the amount of external
light required for controlling the lighting.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from
high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is
out of view.
NOTE:
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens
will cause the system to function improperly.
3
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Parking Lights
From the O (off) position, rotate the headlight switch to the
first detent (parking position) to turn on the parking lights.
The parking light indicator in the instrument cluster will
illuminate.
Headlight Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit
area.
If the headlight switch is in AUTO position and headlights
were on before the ignition is OFF, the delay interval begins
automatically.
Headlight Delay Disable
The feature is disabled by turning on the headlights, the
parking lights or by placing the ignition in the RUN
position.
If you shut off the lights before the ignition is turned on,
they will turn off in the normal manner.
The time delay of the headlights is programmable between
0, 30, 60 and 90 seconds. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within two minutes
of placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature.
Headlight Delay Activation
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
headlights within two minutes. The delay interval begins
when the headlight switch is turned off from the “Lowbeam” position.
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight switch.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the fog
light button on the headlight switch. To turn off the front
fog lights, push the fog light button on the headlight switch
a second time or turn off the headlight switch.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. Selecting the high beam
headlights will turn off the fog lights.
NOTE: When the Daytime Running Lights are on and a
turn signal is activated, the Daytime Running Lamp will
turn off on the side of the vehicle in which the turn signal
is flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on
when the turn signal is turned off.
Cornering Lights
INTERIOR LIGHTS
The cornering lights are a feature to improve visibility at
night while turning the vehicle. When activated, a light
incorporated in the front fog light will illuminate on the
side of the vehicle the steering wheel is rotated or the turn
signal indicator is on. It can be activated through the
Uconnect System.
Courtesy Lights
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Interior Lights Dimmer Switch
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or downward
to increase or decrease the brightness of the ambient light
located in the overhead console, door handle lights, lower
instrument panel lights, door map pocket lights, and cubby
bin lights.
3
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotate the instrument
panel dimmer control upward or downward to increase or
decrease the brightness of the instrument panel. The instrument panel dimmer has two position at the top of the thumb
wheel. The first detent position puts the interior lighting into
daytime mode and at the very top detent position will
illuminate all the interior lights. At the bottom detent position
of the of the instrument panel dimmer, the internal backlights
to their lowest dimmable setting and disable the interior
lights.
Front Lights
The courtesy lights are mounted between the sun visors
above the rear view mirror. The light switches are used to
turn the lights on or off.
Courtesy Lights
1 — Driver’s Courtesy Lights
Headlight Switch
1 — Ambient Light Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
NOTE:
• Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the interior
lights are turned off. This will prevent the battery from
discharging once the doors are closed.
• If a light is left on, it will automatically be turned off
after approximately 15 minutes after the ignition is in the
OFF position.
Courtesy Light Switches
1— Left Switch
2— Right Switch
To operate the courtesy lights, push either the driver or
passenger light switch.
3
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Lights
Vehicles With Retractable Roof
Push the button on the rear dome light once to turn the
light on, the light will remain on at all times. Push the
button a second time to turn the light off, the lights will
remain off at all times.
For vehicles equipped with a retractable roof, there are two
interior lights located above the grab handles of the rear
doors.
Rear Interior Light
Rear Dome Light
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Timing Entering The Vehicle
The dome lights illuminate in the following ways:
• When the doors are unlocked, the dome light will
illuminate for approximately 27 seconds.
• When one of the doors is opened, the dome light will
illuminate for approximately three minutes.
• When the doors are closed, the dome light will automatically shut off after approximately 27 seconds.
The timing stops once the ignition is placed in the RUN or
ON position.
The dome light will turn off under any of the following
conditions:
Interior Light Locations
The lights come on by opening any of the doors.
Dome Light Timing
The Dome Light will automatically illuminate when the
doors are unlocked, the doors are opened or after the doors
are closed.
• The dome light is disabled when the ignition is placed in
the RUN or ON position.
• The dome lights will turn off automatically when the
doors are locked.
• The dome lights will automatically turn off after approximately fifteen minutes of inactivity to preserve the
battery.
3
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Timing Exiting The Vehicle
The dome light will illuminate under the following conditions when the ignition is placed to the OFF position and
the key is removed:
• The dome light will illuminate for 27 seconds after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position.
• The opening of one of the doors (approximately three
minutes).
• After closing a door (approximately 27 seconds).
The dome light timing is disabled when the doors are
locked.
Internal Compartment Lights
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on each sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover will turn the light off.
Vanity Mirror
1 — Mirror Light
2 — Mirror Cover
Cargo Area Lights
Two interior lights are located in the cargo area on the side
trim panels.
These lights automatically turn on/off when the liftgate is
opened and closed, regardless of the position of the ignition.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
WIPERS AND WASHERS
CAUTION! (Continued)
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
lever on the right side of the steering column. The front
wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located on the
end of the lever.
and the blades cannot return to the “park” position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
3
Front Wiper Operation
Rotate the windshield wiper knob to one of the two detent
positions for intermittent settings, the third detent for low
wiper operation and the fourth for high wiper operation.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold
while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the
intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and operate for
several wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the off position,
the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn
off.
Windshield Wiper Stalk
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the
windshield wiper blades from returning to the “park”
position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned off,
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
(Continued)
(Continued)
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
Mist
NOTE: If the end of the multifunction lever rotates from off
to the first intermittent setting or from the first intermittent
setting to the second intermittent setting, the wipers will
perform a round up to clean the windshield.
This function can be activated or deactivated by the
Uconnect Settings through the radio. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in the “Multimedia” for further information.
Use this feature when weather conditions make occasional
usage of the wipers necessary. Push the lever upward to
the MIST position and release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE: The Mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is
especially useful for road splash or overspray from the
windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of
the multifunction lever to one of the two detent positions
for intermittent settings, to activate this feature.
Rain Sensor
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
sensitive, and wiper delay position two is the most sensitive. Place the wiper switch in the off position when not
using the system.
Rain Sensing Wipers – Inhibition
When the user switches the ignition to OFF, leaving the
lever in intermittent positions, no wipe cycle is performed
for safety reasons. This temporary inhibition avoids accidental activations of the wiping (e.g during the hand
washing of the windscreen, blocking the blades in ice/
snow conditions). The user can activate the Rain Sensing
Wipers in three ways:
• Moving the level in off position and then in Intermittent
positions.
• One MIST command actuation.
• The vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h) and the rain
sensor detects the presence of rain.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
Rear Wiper Operation
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the lever on
the right side of the steering column. The rear wiper/
washer is operated by rotating a switch, located at the
middle of the lever.
NOTE: If the front wiper is moving and the vehicle is
shifted in REVERSE, the rear wiper will perform one round
up to clean the rear window.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the
first detent for intermittent operation and to the
second detent for continuous rear wiper operation. If the
front wiper is set to Automatic Mode (on the wiper stalk as
well as “Enabled” through Uconnect settings), placing the
3
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
rear wiper in an intermittent position will cause the front
and rear wipers to sync up. Turning the front wipers off
will cause the rear wipers to also stop.
To use the washer, push the lever forward and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pushed
while in the intermittent setting, the wiper will
turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after
the end of the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off position,
the wiper will operate for several wipe cycles, then turn off.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 30 seconds. Once the lever is
released, the pump will resume normal operation.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located with the
Climate Controls on the instrument panel. Push this
button to turn on the rear window defroster. An indicator in
the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is
on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after
approximately 20 minutes. To manually shut the defroster off,
push the button a second time.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Wiper
De-Icer feature that may be activated under the following
conditions:
• Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer will be activated automatically in the case of a
cold weather manual start with full front defrost, and
the ambient temperature is below 40° F (4.4° C).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
• Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield Wiper
De-Icer will be activated automatically when the rear
defrost is turned on and the ambient temperature is
below 40° F (4.4° C).
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Air Outlet And Diffuser Locations — Passenger
Compartment
3
• Activation By Remote Start Operation — When Remote
Start is active and the outside ambient temperature is
less than 40° F (4.4° C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer
will be enabled. Upon exiting remote start mode the
Windshield Wiper De-Icer will remain on.
Auto-On Rear Window Defroster/Windshield Wiper DeIcer— If Equipped
When turning the vehicle ON, the Rear Window Defroster
and Windshield Wiper De-Icer will automatically turn on
when the outside ambient temperature is less than 40° F
(4.4° C).
The Rear Window Defroster and Windshield Wiper De-Icer
automatically turn off after approximately 20 minutes. To
manually shut the defroster/windshield off, push the
button a second time.
Left Side Air Outlets
1
2
3
4
— Adjustable Air Outlet
— Air Vane Adjustment
— Air Flow Outlet Adjustment
— Fixed Air Outlet
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Center Air Outlets
1
2
3
4
— Fixed Air Outlet
— Air Flow Outlet Adjustment
— Air Vane Adjustment
— Adjustable Air Outlet
Right Side Air Outlets
1
2
3
4
— Fixed Air Outlet
— Adjustable Air Outlet
— Air Vane Adjustment
— Air Flow Outlet Adjustment
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Manual Climate Controls Overview
3
Manual Climate Controls
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon
Description
MAX A/C Setting
MAX A/C sets the system for maximum cooling performance. Rotate the temperature control
adjust knob counterclockwise to the MAX A/C setting. In MAX A/C, the blower speed and
mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings.
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Description
A/C Button
Push this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged.
Recirculation Button
Push this control button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
• Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Front Defrost Mode
Air is directed through the windshield and side window demister outlets. Use this mode with
maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix or Defrost, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only when required.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
Icon
Panel Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Description
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 20 minutes.
Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial counterclockwise into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures,
while rotating clockwise into the red area indicates warmer temperatures. Rotating the Temperature Control all the way counterclockwise results in turning on the MAX A/C feature.
Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any
mode. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the “0” (OFF) position.
Panel Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow. The center instrument panel outlets can be adjusted so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
3
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Floor Mode
Mix Mode
Description
Floor Mode
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Rear Window Defrosting
Push and release the rear window defrost button to turn
the function on/off.
Activation of this function is indicated by the rear defrost
indicator light on the instrument panel turning on. The
function is automatically deactivated after 20 minutes.
If equipped, push the rear defrost button to activate the
defrosting of door mirrors and heated rear window.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
CAUTION!
To avoid causing damage to the rear window defroster
heating filaments do not affix stickers or other objects
to the inside of the rear glass.
Air Recirculation
Push and release the Air Recirculation button so that the
LED is on, to enter recirculation mode. It is recommended
to turn the internal air recirculation on while standing in
traffic or in tunnels to prevent the introduction of polluted
air.
Do not use the function for a long period of time, particularly if there are many passengers in the vehicle, to prevent
the windows from misting up.
NOTE: Internal air recirculation makes it possible to reach
the required heating or cooling conditions quickly depending on the mode selected. Do not use the internal air
recirculation function on rainy/cold days as it would
considerably increase the possibility of the windows misting.
System Maintenance
In Winter, the Climate Control system must be turned on at
least once a month for approximately ten minutes.
Have the system inspected at an authorized dealer before
the summer.
NOTE: The system uses R-1234yf (refrigerant) which does
not pollute the environment in the event of accidental
leakage. Under no circumstances is the use of R-134a
(refrigerant) allowed.
3
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Automatic Climate Controls
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon
Description
MAX A/C Setting
MAX A/C sets the system for maximum cooling performance. Rotate the driver temperature
control adjust knob counterclockwise for MAX A/C. Both driver and passenger temperature displays will show MAX A/C LO. In MAX A/C, the blower speed and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch to the selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
Icon
Description
A/C Button
Push the A/C Control Button to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when the
A/C is ON. Pushing the AUTO control button will cause the A/C operation to change to AUTO
mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
SYNC Button
Push the Sync button to toggle the Sync feature ON/OFF. The Sync indicator will illuminate
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting
with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Sync
mode will automatically exit this feature and return to the separate management of air temperatures in the two zones.
Recirculation Button
Push to change the current setting. The LED illuminates when ON.
NOTE:
• When in Max Defrost mode, the Recirculation button will change the setting to normal Defrost mode. This indicates that you can not enter to this mode due to fogging risk.
• When the Auto indicator is ON and the Recirculation indicator is off, the Recirculation is in
AUTO mode. If the Recirculation indicator is on, the Recirculation setting is manual and Recirculation is on.
AUTO Button — If Equipped
Pushing this button will automatically control the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing this function will cause the automatic climate controls
to change between manual mode and automatic modes.
3
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Description
MAX Defrost Button
Push the MAX Defrost button to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Performing this function will cause the automatic climate
controls to change to manual mode. The blower speed increases to full (all LEDs on) when
MAX Defrost mode is selected, the air conditioning compressor is turned on (LED on), both
driver and passenger temperature controls are set to (HI), defrost mode is selected (LED on),
rear defroster is turned on (LED on) and the air recirculation is turned off (LED off). If the MAX
Defrost mode is turned off, the climate system will return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push the Rear Defrost button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear
window defroster automatically turns OFF after 20 minutes.
Passenger Temperature Knob
Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Rotate the adjustment knob to set
desired temperature shown in the Temperature Display. The set temperature is shown on the
display. Turning the control knob completely in one direction or the other activates the HI
(maximum heating) or LO (maximum cooling) functions shown in the display, respectively. To
deactivate these functions, turn the temperature knob to the desired temperature.
NOTE: Rotating the Passenger Temperature Control knob while in Sync mode will automatically exit Sync.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
Icon
Windshield Mode
Panel Mode
Floor Mode
Description
Blower Control Knob
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. Adjusting the blower will cause the automatic mode to change to manual operation. The speeds can be
selected by rotating the Blower Control adjustment knob.
Windshield Mode
Air comes from the outlets directed at the windshield meant for defrosting, and side window
demisting. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
3
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Bi-Level Mode
Mix Mode
Description
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode is obtained by pressing both the Panel Mode button and the Floor Mode button,
activating them both. Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: Bi-Level Mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode is obtained by pressing both the Windshield Mode button and the Floor Mode button, activating them both. Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister
outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control Power Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control on/off.
Driver Temperature Knob
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Rotate the adjustment knob to set
desired temperature shown in the Temperature Display. Rotate fully counterclockwise for maximum A/C (LO). The set temperature is shown on the display. Turning the control knob completely in one direction or the other activates the HI (maximum heating) or LO (maximum cooling) functions shown in the display, respectively. To deactivate these functions, turn the
temperature knob to the desired temperature.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Climate Control System Compressor
Push the A/C Control button to activate/deactivate the
compressor (activation is indicated by the LED on the
button turning on).
The system remembers that the compressor has been
turned off, even after the engine has stopped.
Pushing the A/C button will stop AUTO MODE (AUTO
LED will turn off). To restore automatic control of compressor, push the AUTO button again.
NOTE: With the compressor off, air cannot be introduced
to the passenger compartment with a temperature lower
than the outside temperature. Under certain environmental
conditions, windows could fog rapidly since the air is not
dehumidified.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the system for maximum cooling performance.
Rotate the driver temperature control adjust knob counterclockwise for MAX A/C. Both driver and passenger temperature displays will show MAX A/C LO.
In MAX A/C, the blower speed and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected
setting and MAX A/C to exit.
3
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rapid Window Demisting (MAX-Defrost Function)
Push the MAX-defrost button to activate (LED on) the
windshield and side window demisting function.
The Climate Control system carries out the following
operations:
• Turns on the air conditioning compressor when environmental conditions are suitable.
• Turns air recirculation off.
• Sets blower fan to the maximum speed.
When the Recirculation Control or AUTO buttons are
pushed, the Climate Control system will deactivate the
Front Defrost (MAX-DEF) function.
Selecting the footwell/windshield or only windshield distribution activates the Climate Control system compressor
and the air recirculation is set to outside air intake.
This logic guarantees optimum visibility at the windows.
Max-defrost is also available in manual mode.
Rear Window Defrosting
• Directs air flow to windshield and front side window
diffusers.
Push and release the rear window defrost button to turn
the function on/off.
• Activates the heated rear window defrost.
Activation of this function is indicated by the rear defrost
indicator light on the instrument panel turning on. The
function is automatically deactivated after 20 minutes. If
equipped, push the rear defrost button to activate the
defrosting of door mirrors and heated rear window.
• Activates the heated windshield (if equipped).
• Displays the fan speed (Blower Control Indicator LED
illuminated).
When the function is activated, the AUTO button LED
turns off. With the function activated, the only possible
manual adjustments are pushing the A/C control button,
adjusting the fan speed and turning the heated rear window off.
CAUTION!
To avoid causing damage to the rear window defroster
heating filaments do not affix stickers or other objects
to the inside of the rear glass.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
Turning Off The Climate Control System
System Maintenance
Push the ON/OFF button.
In Winter, the Climate Control system must be turned on at
least once a month for approximately ten minutes.
With the Climate Control system off:
• Air recirculation is on, isolating the passenger compartment from the outside.
Have the system inspected at an authorized dealership
before the summer.
• The A/C compressor is off.
NOTE: The system uses R-1234yf (refrigerant) which does
not pollute the environment in the event of accidental
leakage. Under no circumstances is the use of R-134a
(refrigerant) allowed.
• The blower is off.
• The heated rear window can be activated/deactivated.
NOTE: The Climate Control unit stores the temperatures
set before the system was turned off and restores them
when one of the following knobs/buttons is pushed:
• A/C
• Recirculation
• Max Defrost
• Blower Increase
• AUTO
To restart the Climate Control system in fully automatic
mode, push the AUTO button.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the front ATC panel and the
word “AUTO” will illuminate in the front ATC display,
along with two temperatures for the driver and front
passenger. The system will then automatically regulate
the amount of airflow.
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to
maintain, by adjusting the driver, and passenger temperatures. Once the desired temperature is displayed,
the system will achieve and automatically maintain that
comfort level.
3
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The
system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode,
and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage
immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by changing
the front blower knob setting.
Winter Operation
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
NOTE: The system will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost mode
must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side
glass.
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended, because it may
cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e.,
vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do
not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from
the air. Contact your authorized dealer to service your
cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
3
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Operating Tips Chart
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
WINDOWS
Power Window Controls
The power window switch is located on the driver’s door
panel. The driver’s power window switch controls the
operation of all the windows.
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition is
in the ON or RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Uconnect, the power
window switches will remain active for up to three minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
WARNING!
Power Window Switches
1 — Opening/Closing Left/Right Front Window
2 — Opening/Closing Left/Right Rear Window (If Equipped)
3 — Window Lockout Switch (Rear Doors)
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
3
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Down Feature
NOTE:
The driver door power window switch and the passenger
door power window switches have an Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch down, for a short period of time,
and release and the window will go down automatically.
• If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again
to close the window.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
down briefly and release it when you want the window to
stop.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoclosure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first
detent and hold to close the window manually.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Auto-Reverse Protection — If
Equipped
Lift the window switch up, for a short period of time, and
release and the window will go up automatically.
WARNING!
There is no auto-reverse protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the
window path before closing.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
Reset Auto-Up
To close the window part way, lift the window switch
briefly and release it when you want the window to stop.
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the
window completely and continue to hold the switch
down for an additional two seconds after the window is
fully open.
Wind Buffeting
MY SKY SUN ROOF — IF EQUIPPED
Removable Roof — If Equipped
The roof consists of front and rear panels that can be
removed independently.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
My Sky Retractable Roof
3
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power My Sky — If Equipped
Open/Close The Front Panel
The power My Sky switches are located on the overhead
console. The switches are used to open and close the front
panel.
My Sky Retractable Roof Removed
On some vehicles the front panel can be power operated.
Refer to “Power My Sky” in this section.
CAUTION!
The panels are able to withstand the snow. However, it
is recommended that you remove excessive layers of
snow that have accumulated or damage to the panels
may occur.
Front Panel Operation Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
During the vent operation any push on the open/close
switch will stop the closing of the panel.
NOTE: If the My Sky is in open position, the vent switch
must be held until the panel vents.
Auto-Reverse Feature
The front panel of the retractable roof is equipped with a
auto-reverse safety system that is able to detect the presence of an obstacle during the opening and closing motion
of the panel.
Operation Switch
1 — Front Panel Open/Close Switch
2 — Front Panel Vent Switch
To retract the front panel to the open position, push the
open/close button.
From the fully open position, pull the open/close switch:
the front panel will close completely.
When this event occurs, the front panel stops and reverses
immediately.
NOTE: With both panels removed the retractable roof
cannot be opened or closed.
Removing And Installing Panels
NOTE:
• Remove the panels only when the vehicle is stationary.
Venting The Front Panel
• The rear panel can be removed only when the front
panel is completely closed or removed.
To vent the front panel push and release the vent switch.
Removing Panels
1. Front panel must be in the closed position to remove
panels.
3
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Locate the My Sky Key inside the panel storage bag in
the cargo area.
Latch Key Hole
My Sky Key
3. From inside of the passenger compartment, insert the
My Sky Key into the latch key hole.
4. Rotate and keep the key turned to the symbol to release
the lock.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
3
Rotating My Sky Key
5. Pull the panel handle down and away from the stowed
position, unlocking the panel.
Unlocking Panel Handle
6. Remove the key from the latch key hole.
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Removing Key
7. Push panel up and away from latch to create a small
gap.
Push Panel Up
8. Remove the panel from the outside of the vehicle.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
Installing Panel
NOTE: Rear panel must be installed before the front panel.
1. From outside the vehicle, place the panel on the slides.
2. Gently slide the front panel forward, or the rear panel
backwards.
3. Align the colored guide tabs to ensure the panel(s) close
properly. Front panel is labeled with yellow guide tabs.
Rear panel is labeled with blue guide tabs.
Removing Panel
9. Place the panel inside of the provided bag for storage in
the cargo area. Repeat the process for the rear panel.
NOTE: An air deflector is available on the Jeep accessory
line. This deflector may be used to avoid the “wind
buffeting” inside the vehicle, if the front panel is removed.
Guide Tabs
3
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle down and
toward the stowed position, locking it into place.
5. Make sure that the panel has been properly refitted.
From inside the passenger compartment, push upward
on the panel from the bottom, in order to verify that it is
properly latched to the clamping locks.
Closing Panel Handle
Push To Lock Panel
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
Bag For Housing Panels — If Equipped
For proper housing, proceed as follows:
After the panels have been removed, store the roof panels
inside of the bag located inside the storage compartment.
1. Open the Roof Panel Bag and lift the panel dividers
toward the outside.
NOTE: It is recommended to do this procedure outside of
the vehicle.
3
Panel Dividers
Roof Panel Bag
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the front panel into the bag and fold the panel
dividers down.
Second Panel In Storage Bag
4. Close the bag and place it on the inside the cargo area.
First Panel In Storage Bag
3. Place the rear panel into the bag on top of dividers.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
5. Open the Velcro straps provided on the bag. Anchor
them firmly at the tie-down hooks located in the cargo
area.
3
Tie-Down Straps
NOTE:
• Do not load objects that weigh over 165 pounds (75 kg)
on top of the Roof Panel Bag.
Tie-Down Hook Locations
• The bag is washable. Refer to the documentation that is
supplied with the bag.
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency Open/Close
If the Power My Sky switch fails, the retractable roof can be
operated manually as follows:
1. Remove the protective cap located on the inner lining.
2. Remove the Allen Key or My Sky Key that is supplied in
the tool bag in the cargo area.
3. Insert the Allen Key or My Sky Key into the key hole
and turn it clockwise to open the roof or counterclockwise to close.
Emergency Key And Key Hole
1 — Key Hole
2 — Allen Key
CAUTION!
• When refitting panels, be careful to avoid fingers,
scarves, ties and items of clothing from getting
caught under the panels themselves.
• Do not open the roof in the presence of snow or ice.
There is risk of damage.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety
latch release lever toward the passenger side of the
vehicle. The hood release lever is located behind the
center front edge of the hood.
3
HOOD
To Open The Hood
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the driver’s
side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Remove the support rod from the locking tab and insert it
into the seat located on the underside of the hood. Be sure
the rod is locked into position.
Safety Latch
1 — Safety Latch Location
Locking Tab
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm) from
the engine compartment and drop. Make sure that the
hood is completely closed.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Support Rod And Seat
1 — Support Rod
2 — Support Rod Seat
To Close The Hood
Hold up the hood with one hand, and with the other hand,
remove the support rod from its seat and reinsert it into the
locking tab.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
3
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
LIFTGATE
Opening
To unlock the liftgate, use the key fob or activate the power
door lock switches located on the driver door handle.
The Liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built into the
Electronic Liftgate release. With a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the Liftgate, push the Electronic
Liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
To open the liftgate, squeeze the electronic liftgate release
and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
Passive Entry Liftgate Handle Location
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release
2 — Liftgate Passive Entry Location
Liftgate Handle Location
1 — Liftgate Handle
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
Emergency Opening
Proceed as follows:
4. Insert the screwdriver into the release tab slot to trigger
the release tab of the liftgate.
1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped).
3
2. Fold the rear seats forward.
3. Using the supplied screwdriver (located under cargo
floor in tool kit), remove the yellow tab.
Emergency Release Tab Slot Location
1 — Release Tab Slot
Emergency Opening Tab Location
1 — Yellow Tab
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Closing
To Lock The Liftgate
Grasp the liftgate pull handle and initiate lowering the
liftgate. Release the handle when the liftgate reaches self
closing position.
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, pushing the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
lock button located to the right of the outside handle
release will lock the vehicle.
NOTE: The liftgate unlock feature is built into the electronic liftgate release.
Closing Liftgate
1 — Liftgate Pull Handle
NOTE: Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in
possession of the key because the liftgate may be locked.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
Cargo Area Features
Removable Rear Shelf — If Equipped
To remove rear shelf, proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect the two links that support the shelf at the
eyelets.
3. Clear the pins placed outside of the shelf, and then
remove the rear shelf pulling it upwards.
4. The rear shelf can be stored in the cargo area, or behind
the front seatbacks.
Adjusting The Rear Shelf
Rear Shelf Support Links
1 — Links
2 — Eyelets
2. Lift the rear part of the overhead luggage shelf.
3
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Position 1 (Lowered Position):
This position allows you to make the load floor flat for ease
of loading/unloading objects from the cargo area. This
position also makes it possible to use the space below as
another compartment for storing fragile or smaller objects.
Position 2 (Elevated Position):
When the rear seatbacks and front passenger seat is folded
flat, it will allow for loading objects of long dimensions. It
is recommended to use this position only during the actual
transporting of the objects, then bring the load floor in
position 1.
Rear Shelf Pin
Cargo Load Floor
The vehicle is equipped with a load floor that can be
adjusted as needed.
Table Tilt Load
In addition to the two positions described above, the load
floor can also be placed in a tilted position (slanted toward
the rear seatbacks as to ease the access to the underlying
zone of the luggage compartment (e.g. to pick up the spare
tire or the Tire Service Kit).
Place the load floor in a way that it rests at the supports 1
and 2 on the sides of the cargo area.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109
The load floor provides securing of any cargo inside this
position, so that the cargo will slide in the case of sudden
braking.
3
Table Tilt Load Supports
1 — Loading Floor Support One
2 — Loading Floor Support Two
Load Floor
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Access To The Loading Floor
To access the double load compartment, proceed as follows:
1. Lift up on the Load Floor Handle.
Cargo Area Storage
CAUTION!
The load floor must be arranged in a central position
with respect to cargo area.
Load Floor Handle
1 — Cargo Load Floor
2 — Cargo Load Floor Handle
2. Place the desired objects inside the compartment.
3. Reposition the load floor.
Displacement Load Floor
To position the load from the lower to the upper position,
proceed as follows:
1. Grasp the load floor handle and lift up the load floor.
2. Correctly place the load floor on the side panel guides
and on the rear cross member.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111
Access To Tire Service Kit Or Spare Tire
To access the Tire Service Kit or spare tire and container
carrier, proceed as follows:
The side panels may be equipped with three grocery hooks
(one on the left side and two on the right side) for securing
loads that are not excessively heavy.
1. Grasp the load floor handle and remove the floor.
3
2. Pull the tab and lift up on the carpet.
Anchoring Of The Load
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
Grocery Hook
Tie-Downs
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Grocery Hooks
Cargo Box — If Equipped
The cargo area contains a preformed cargo box that can be
used for the storage of objects that allows you to obtain a
uniform level when loading.
Cargo Box
NOTE: The cargo box is sized for a maximum capacity of
distributed weight equal to 242 lbs (110 kg).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger’s side
of the instrument panel.
3
To open the glove compartment proceed as follows:
1. Unlock the compartment using the vehicle emergency
key.
2. Pull the handle to open the compartment.
Opening The Glove Compartment
1 — Glove Compartment Handle
Once the glove compartment is open, a light will turn on to
illuminate the compartment.
NOTE:
• Do not insert objects in the glove compartment that will
not allow the compartment to fully close.
• The glove compartment should be completely closed
while the vehicle is in motion.
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Sun Visors
Lift upward on the mirror cover to access the mirror.
Sun visors are located on both sides of the rearview mirror.
The visors can be lowered or moved to the side to help
block sunlight from entering the windshield or door glass.
Extendible Sun Visor
To move the sun visor against the driver or passenger door
glass, remove the sun visor from the hook and turn it
toward the side window.
To extend the sun visor, proceed as follows:
1. Place the sun visor against the door glass by detaching
it from the hook and turning it toward the side window.
2. Slide the visor along the rod to provide coverage more
to the rear.
Sun Visor Mirror
Sliding Sun Visor
1 — Sun Visor Mirror Cover
1 — Sun Visor
The visors also have illuminated vanity mirrors to allow
use in low light conditions.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115
3. Slide out the sun visor extender for even more side
coverage toward the rear.
3
12 Volt Power Outlet
Using The Extender
Power Outlets
The front power outlet is located under the center stack of
the instrument panel. It only operates with the ignition in
the RUN position.
Models equipped with the optional ⬙smoker kit,⬙ will have
a cigar lighter instead of the power outlet. Refer to “Cigar
Lighter⬙ in “Internal Equipment” for further information.
Rear Power Outlet
The rear cargo power outlet is located on the left side of the
cargo area.
The outlet only works when the ignition is in the RUN
position.
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Rear 12 Volt Cargo Power Outlet
NOTE: The rear cargo power outlet can be changed to
“battery” powered all the time by switching the power
outlet Integrated Power Module 20A fuse from fuse location F18 to F30. Refer to “Fuses” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
(Continued)
Do not connect devices with power higher than 180
Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do not damage the
socket by using unsuitable adaptors. If the 180 Watt (15
Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
(Continued)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 117
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Power Inverter — If Equipped
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt Power Inverter outlet located
on the back of the center console to convert DC current to
AC current. The Power Inverter can power cellular phones,
electronics and other low power devices requiring up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles will
exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.
3
115 Volt Power Inverter
The Power Inverter will automatically turn on and off
when the device is plugged in or removed.
The Power Inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the
Power Inverter will automatically shut down. Once the
electrical device has been removed from the Power Inverter
it will automatically reset. To avoid overloading the circuit,
check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using
the Power Inverter.
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Cigar Lighter — If Equipped
NOTE: Cigar lighters can be purchased at an authorized
dealer through Mopar parts. To ensure proper cigar lighter
operation, a Mopar knob and element must be used.
The cigar lighter is located on the center console. Push
lighter inward to heat.
Cigar Lighter
After a few seconds, the lighter automatically returns to its
initial position and is ready to be used.
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot. To
avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with care.
Always check that the cigar lighter has turned off.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 119
CAUTION!
Do not connect devices with power higher than 180
Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do not damage the
socket by using unsuitable adaptors. If the 180 Watt (15
Amp) power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
3
Ashtray — If Equipped
NOTE: Ashtrays can be purchased at an authorized dealer
through Mopar parts.
The ashtray is a plastic container that can be placed into
one of the cup holders.
Ashtray Location
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Armrest
The front armrest is located between the front seats.
The armrest can be adjusted by moving it in the direction
indicated by the arrows.
Storage Compartment
Front Armrest Handle
Push the storage handle and lift up the armrest to access
the storage compartment.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 121
Cupholders
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers,
located in the center console.
There are two cupholders located in the rear armrest if
equipped.
3
Front Cupholders
Rear Cupholders
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Handle Grip
The handle grip is located on the passenger side of the
instrument panel. The handle can be used to enter or exit
the vehicle or when traveling on rough terrain.
Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is placed
on the Roof Luggage Rack. Check the straps frequently to
be sure that the load remains securely attached.
NOTE: Crossbars can be purchased at a authorized dealer
through Mopar parts. External racks do not increase the
total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the
total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the
load on the Roof Luggage Rack, do not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
The load carried on the roof, when equipped with a
luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and it should
be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Do not use the retractable roof when using the crossbars.
WARNING!
Handle Grip
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Roof Luggage Rack
for transporting accessories.
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal
injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 123
CAUTION!
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity. Always
distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and
secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads, which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, should be secured to
both the front and rear of the vehicle.
• Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
• Load should always be secured to cross bars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting
mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains securely
attached.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
▫ Yellow Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . .127
▫ Green Telltale Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . .129
▫ Blue Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
▫ White Telltale Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Oil Change Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items . . . . . .131
▫ Gray Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . . .165
䡵 TRIP COMPUTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
䡵 WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
4
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Cluster
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
4
Premium Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The gauge will likely indicate a higher temperature
when driving in hot weather or up mountain grades. It
should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
normal operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
• The instrument cluster display features a driverinteractive display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position
•
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the STOP/OFF position, opening/closing of
a door will activate the display for viewing, and display
the total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using a driver interactive display located on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster display can show you
how systems are working and give you warnings when
they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls allow
you to scroll through and enter the main menus and
submenus. You can access the specific information you
want and make selections and adjustments.
The instrument cluster display menu items consist of the
following:
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
• Speedometer
The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive
display that is located in the instrument cluster.
4
Instrument Cluster Display Location
• Vehicle Info
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Audio
• Messages
• Screen Setup
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Settings
• DOWN Arrow Button
Setting the system allows the driver to select information
by pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu and
submenus.
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
• BACK/LEFT Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
• OK Button
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
• UP Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and submenus.
The OK button may be used for the following:
• Select
• Reset (hold)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
Oil Change Reset
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will display
in the instrument cluster display for five seconds after a
single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition is cycled to the ON or RUN
position. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure.
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON/
RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. See your authorized dealer to have the oil life reset.
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
NOTE: The instrument cluster display menu items display
in the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items may
vary depending on your vehicle features.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
speedometer menu icon is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the OK button to toggle
units (mph or km/h) of the speedometer.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
⬙Vehicle Info⬙ is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the right arrow button and
Coolant Temp will be displayed. Push the right or left
arrow button to scroll through the following information
displays:
• Tire Pressure — View the information relating to the
TPMS system (If Equipped).
4
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Coolant Temperature — View the engine coolant temperature.
• Trans Temperature — View the trans oil temperature.
• Battery Voltage — View the voltage value (state of
charge) of the battery.
• Service — If Equipped — View the service status message(s).
Fuel Economy
This menu item allows you to set the unit of measurement
for the ⬙Fuel Economy and Range.⬙
• Range (Miles or km)
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Trip menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. Toggle the left or right arrow button to select Trip
A or Trip B. The Trip information will display the following:
• Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled
for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
• Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel
economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of Trip A or Trip
B since the last reset.
• Current Consumption (mpg or L/100km or km/l)
• Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of travel
since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
• Average Consumption (mpg or L/100km or km/l)
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Reset procedure shown at the bottom of the display.
Stored Messages
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Messages Menu Icon is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. This feature shows the number of stored
warning messages. Pushing the left or right arrow button
will allow you to scroll through the stored messages.
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Audio menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
Screen Setup
In The Upper-Left/Top Right
This menu item allows you to change the position of the
information on the display.
The information relating to the following can be displayed:
• External temperature
Display Gears (Vehicles With Reconfigurable MultiFunctional Display And Automatic Transmission)
• Ignition Button — If Equipped
By selecting this item, you can select the display mode, the
particulars relating to the automatic transmission, and
choose between the following options:
• Date (Month/Day)
• ⴖSingle digitⴖ
In the central area of the display, you can view all of the
information listed above as well as the following:
• Compass — If Equipped
The right side of the display will show the letter concerning
the automatic transmission gear selector (P,R,N or D)
position. After approximately two seconds, the letter will
be displayed in a central position.
• ⴖFull PRNDⴖ
(Default): The right side of the display the letters PRND,
the position assumed by the gear selector will be highlighted in the display. During the operation in sequential
mode (⬙AutoStick⬙), in place of the letter D, the gear will be
will be displayed.
• Compass — If Equipped
• Time (Hours/Minutes)
• Speed Display — If Equipped
• Date (Day/Month/Year)
• Time
• Compass — If Equipped
• Ignition Button — If Equipped
• External Temp — If equipped
• Menu Item
• Distance Traveled A (Trip A)
• Distance Traveled B (Trip B)
4
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Restore Default Settings
“Display”
Selecting this item, and you can reset and restore the
default settings.
By selecting the ⬙Display,⬙ you can access the following
settings:
Settings
• Language: allows you to select the language in which to
display the information/warnings.
This menu item allows you to change the settings for the
following:
• Display
ⴖUnits Of Measureⴖ
• Units
By selecting the item ⬙Units of Measure,⬙ you can select the
unit of measure to use for displaying various magnitudes.
• Clock and Date
Possible options are:
• Security
• Safety and Assistance
• Lights
• Doors and Locks
Vehicles Equipped With Multifunctional Display Reconfigurable: The following menu/submenu items are
available in the cluster display.
• US
• Metric
• Custom
• Imperial
ⴖClock & Dataⴖ
By selecting the item, ⬙Clock & Date⬙ you can adjust the
clock.
Possible options are:
• Set Time: adjust hours/minutes
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
• Set Format: adjust the time format ⬙12h⬙ (12 hours) or ⬙
24h⬙ (24 hours)
• Set Date: adjust day/month/year
Security
By selecting the item “Security,” you can make the following adjustments:
• Speed Warning:
Set the vehicle speed limit, which the driver is notified
through a visual and acoustic signaling (display of a
message and a symbol on the display).
When the speed warning is set, the icon should remain
visualized for the same duration time of the pop up. If the
driver exceeded the speed set the icon should remain for
however long the vehicle is over the set speed.
• Hill Start Assist:
Activation/Deactivation of the Hill Start Assist system.
• Passenger Air Bag — If Equipped
Front passenger air bag may be enabled or disabled.
ⴖLightsⴖ
By selecting the item ⬙Lights,⬙ you can make the following
adjustments:
• Headlight Off Delay: set the delay for headlight shutoff
after engine shutoff
• Headlight Sensitivity: adjust the sensitivity of headlight
brightness
• Daytime Running Lights: activate/deactivate the daytime running lights
Driver may also turn the Speed Warning “OFF” should you
choose not to use this feature.
• Cornering lights: activate/deactivate the cornering
lights (If Equipped)
• Seat Belt Reminder:
• Interior Ambient lights: adjust the level of interior
ambient lights
This function is only viewable when the Seat Belt Reminder (SBR) system is active.
• Greeting Lights: activate / deactivate greeting lights
4
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ⴖDoors & Locksⴖ
“Compass”
By selecting the item ⬙Doors & Locks,⬙ you can make the
following adjustments:
By selecting the item “Compass” you can make the following adjustments:
• Auto Door Lock: activate/deactivate the automatic locking of the doors with the vehicle moving
• Compass Calibration
• Compass Variance
• Auto Unlock On Exit: automatic unlocking of the doors
when exiting the vehicle
TRIP COMPUTER
• Flash Light with Lock: activate the direction indicators
when closing the doors
The Trip computer is used to display information on car
operation when the key is turned to the RUN position.
• Sound Horn With Lock: activate/deactivate the horn
when pushing the LOCK button on the key fob. The
options are ⬙Off,⬙ ⬙First Press,” and ⬙Second Press⬙
This function allows you to define two separate trips called
“Trip A” and “Trip B” where the car’s ⬙complete trips⬙ are
monitored in an independent manner.
• Horn With Remote Start: activate/deactivate the horn at
the Remote Starting of the engine with the key fob
Both trips can be reset (reset - start of a new trip). To
perform a reset, push and hold the OK button on the
steering wheel controls.
• Remote Door Unlock: allows you to open the driver
door only on the first push of the UNLOCK button on
the key fob
• Passive Entry (If Equipped) : activate the automatic
locking of the doors
“Trip A” and “Trip B” are used to display the figures
relating to:
• Distance Travelled
• Average Consumption
• Travel Time (driving time)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
Quantities Displayed
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
Distance Travelled
The warning/indicator light switches on in the instrument
panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic
signal when applicable. These indications are indicative
and precautionary and as such must not be considered as
exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained
in the Owner Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this
chapter in the event of a failure indication.
• Indicates the distance travelled by the start of the new trip.
Average Consumption
• Represents the average fuel consumption since the start
of the new trip.
Travel Time
• Elapsed time since the start of the new trip.
OK Button
Short Push Of The Button: display of various parameters.
Long Push Of The Button: reset quantities and begin a new trip.
New trip
Starts after reset:
• ⬙Manual⬙ by pushing the OK button.
• ⬙Automatic⬙ when the ⬙distance⬙ reaches the value is
62140 (99999.9 km) or when the ⬙time travel⬙ reaches the
value of 999.59 (999 hours and 59 minutes).
• After each disconnection and reconnection of the battery.
All active telltales will display first, if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
The following warning lamps and indicators will alert you
to a vehicle condition that may become serious. Some
lamps will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make
sure they work. If any lamps remain on after starting your
vehicle, refer to the respective system warning lamp for
further information.
4
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Red Telltale Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving,
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems”
in “Safety” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
English
Metric
What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the
full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will
run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
4
140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the STOP/OFF position to
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is
arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle
and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Oil Pressure Fail Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Sensor Fail Warning Light
This light indicates that the oil pressure sensor has failed.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
4
142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates vehicle oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is
running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump-Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency.”
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a
set threshold.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to
“If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Electric Power Steering System).
Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
4
144 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Hood Open Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn when the liftgate is open.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
Transmission Fault Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with a message in the instrument cluster display and a
buzzer) to indicate a transmission fault. Contact your authorized dealer if the message remains
after restarting the engine.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on
the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped
and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle under power, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine vehicle under power, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, and your vehicle may require towing. The
light will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
4
146 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale Lights
Automatic Headlight Fail
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Automatic Headlight Fail
This light illuminates when there is a failure of the automatic headlights. If this light illuminates,
have it inspected at an authorized dealer.
Rain Sensor Failure
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Rain Sensor Failure
This light illuminates when the rain sensor fails. If this light illuminates, have an authorized
dealer inspect it.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is placed in
the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
148 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position. It should go out when the engine is running. If the “ESC Indicator Light”
comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several
miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon
as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the ESC system will be ON, even
if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC telltale will flash when in an ESC event (loss of traction).
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
NOTE: This telltale indicates that an ESC event is active.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Electronic Park Brake Fail Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Park Brake Fail Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Electronic Park Brake is not functioning properly and that
service is required. Contact your authorized dealership.
Fuel Level Sensor Failure
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Fuel Level Sensor Failure
This light illuminates when there is a fuel level sensor failure. If this light illuminates, take it to
an authorized dealer and have them inspect it.
4
150 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Fuel Cutoff Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Fuel Cutoff Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate after an accident has occurred, and the system has shut the fuel off.
Forward Collision Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Forward Collision Indicator Light
This telltale will turn on warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
Forward Collision Warning Off Warning (FCW) Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Forward Collision Warning is off.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
Icy Road Condition Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Icy Road Condition Indicator Light
This light will illuminate during an icy road condition.
Keyless System Failure
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Keyless System Failure
This light illuminates when there is a keyless system failure. If this light illuminates, take it to an
authorized dealer and have them inspect it.
Low Fuel Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.3–1.85 gal (5–7 L) this light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
4
152 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense is solid yellow when the system senses a lane drift situation.
The LaneSense is flashing yellow when the system senses the lane has been approached and is in
a lane departure situation.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped⬙ in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is not operating and needs service. Please see
your authorized dealer.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disengage
the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer.
Engine Malfunction Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Vehicle Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors emissions control systems. The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before vehicle start up. If the bulb does not come on when placing the
ignition in the ON/RUN position, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the
light after vehicle start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the vehicle is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
4
154 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
CAUTION!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and service
is required.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
4
156 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
Audio System Failure Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Audio System Failure Light
The telltale illuminates to report a failure of the Audio System.
Contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light
This light will illuminate when there is a malfunction in one of the exterior bulbs.
Side Distance Warning — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Side Distance Warning
This light indicates a side distance warning.
4
158 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Towing Hook Breakdown Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Towing Hook Breakdown Light — If Equipped
This light illuminates when there is a failure with the tow hook. Contact your authorized dealer
for service.
Transmission Temperature Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Indicator Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle.
Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light
turns off.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
Vehicle Security Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the vehicle security alarm system has detected an attempt
was made to break into the vehicle.
Wait To Start Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Wait To Start Light
The “Wait To Start” telltale will illuminate for approximately two seconds when the ignition is
turned to the RUN position. It’s duration may be longer based on colder operating conditions.
Vehicle will not initiate start until telltale is no longer displayed. Refer to “Starting The Engine”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
NOTE: The “Wait To Start” telltale may not illuminate if the intake manifold temperature is
warm enough.
4
160 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Green Telltale Lights
Automatic High Beam Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Automatic High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the automatic high beam headlights are on.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the Speed Control is SET. Refer to “Speed Control — If Equipped”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
Hazard Warning Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Hazard Warning Lights
The hazard warning indicators light up when the vehicles Hazard Warning flasher switch has
been pushed.
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Turn Signal Warning Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster arrow will flash independently for the left or right turn signal as selected,
as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up (right).
4
162 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
Blue Telltale Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever
away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the
headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to
pass⬙ scenario.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
White Telltale Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON, but not set.
Light Sensor Failure
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Light Sensor Failure
This light illuminates when there is light sensor failure. If this light illuminates, have an authorized dealer inspect it.
4
164 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Set Speed Warning Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Set Speed Warning Light
When Set Speed Warning is turned on, the speed warning telltale will illuminate in the instrument cluster with a number matching the set speed. When the set speed is exceeded, a single
chime will sound along with pop up message of speed warning exceeded. When the set speed is
exceeded by 1.9 mph (3 km/h) or more, the indication will light up yellow and flash along with
a continuous chime (up to ten seconds or until the speed is no longer exceeded). Speed Warning
can be turned on and off in the instrument cluster display, for further information refer to “Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel.”
NOTE: The number “120” is only an example of a speed that can be set.
Gray Telltale Lights
Cruise Control Cancelled Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Cancelled Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been cancelled by the driver. Refer to “Speed
Control — If Equipped” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing,
see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further
damage to the emission control system. It could also
affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
4
166 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Multimedia”.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
4
SAFETY
CONTENTS
䡵 SAFETY FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . . . .215
▫ Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
䡵 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . .182
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
▫ Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped . . .182
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . .197
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features . . . . . . . .205
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
5
170 SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake System
Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
171
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition is turned to
the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as
possible.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes AntiLock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill
Start Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC), Dynamic Steering Torque (DST), and Hill
Descent Control (HDC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
5
172 SAFETY
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to help the driver accelerate
the vehicle from a complete stop while on an incline. If the
driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA
will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period.
If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time
expires, the system will release brake pressure and the
vehicle will roll down the hill as normal. The system will
release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle
applied.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• The vehicle must be on a 5% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
• For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,
the HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission is
in PARK.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
(Continued)
SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under
all road conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control of your
vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision or serious personal injury.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively
swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. The system may reduce engine
power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to
counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC will become active
automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
173
NOTE: TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer
tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power
may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied
to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
“Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
5
174 SAFETY
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located
in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the
ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
(Continued)
SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operation Modes
To disable ESC and other safety systems, follow the instruction below.
There are three modes of active safety systems present on
the vehicle:
• ESC On
• Partial Off
• Full Off
175
ESC On – Two Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four Wheel
Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High Range
This is the normal operating mode for ESC when operating
a two-wheel drive vehicle. It is also the normal mode for
operating a four-wheel drive vehicle in 2WD or 4WD
HIGH range. The ESC system will be in “ESC On” mode
whenever the vehicle is started or the power transfer unit
(if equipped) is shifted out of 4WD LOW range. This mode
should be used for most driving situations. ESC should
only be turned to “Partial Off” or “Full Off” for specific
reasons as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” and to “Full Off” for
additional information.
NOTE: It is recommended to select the mode ⬙Partial Off⬙
or ⬙Full Off⬙ only for specific reasons.
5
176 SAFETY
Partial Off – Two Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four Wheel
Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High Range
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for driving in deep
snow, sand, or gravel. This mode raises the threshold for
TCS and ESC activation, which allows for more wheel spin
than what ESC normally allows.
the ESC OFF button and the ESC Off indicator light will
turn off. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of
operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand,
or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by momentarily pushing the “ESC Off” button. Once
the situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is overcome,
turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the “ESC Off”
button. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
ESC OFF Button
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” button and the ESC Off indicator light will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described
in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in
“Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
SAFETY
Full Off – Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4WD High And
4WD Low Range
The “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway and
off-road use when ESC stability features could inhibit
vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions. The “ESC
Off” button is located in the lower switch bank above the
climate control panel. To enter “Full Off” mode, push and
hold the “ESC Off” button for five seconds while the
vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five
seconds, the ESC Off indicator light will illuminate and an
“ESC Off” message will appear in the odometer.
In this mode, ESC and TCS are turned off (except for the
“limited slip” feature described in the TCS section) until
the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At speeds
over 40 mph (64 km/h), the system automatically switches
to “Partial Off” mode, described above. When the vehicle
speed returns to less than 35 mph (56 km/h), the ESC
system will return to “Full Off” mode. The ESC OFF
indicator light is always illuminated when ESC is off. To
turn ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC Off”
button. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of
operation.
177
NOTE: With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency
evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist
in maintaining stability. “Full Off” mode is only intended
for off-highway or off-road use.
NOTE:
• “Full Off” is the only operating mode for ESC in 4WD
LOW range. The ESC system will be in this mode
whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW range or
the power transfer unit is shifted into 4WD LOW range.
• The “ESC OFF” message will display and a chime will
sound when the gear selector is moved from any position to the PARK position and then moved out of the
PARK position. This will occur even if the message was
cleared previously.
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped
On models equipped with Selec-Terrain, the activation of
some driving modes provide partial off or full off of some
active safety systems in order to optimize performance in
specific modes.
Partial or full off of the active safety systems will be
indicated by a light in the instrument cluster.
5
178 SAFETY
In ⬙SAND⬙ and ⬙MUD⬙, the active safety systems are
partially disabled and put in place to ensure maximum
performance in the specific mode of operation. However,
you can reactivate them completely at any time by pushing
the ESC button.
NOTE: In 4WD LOW, the active safety systems are completely bypassed in order to ensure maximum off-road
performance.
tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when Traction Control System is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has
been driven several miles/kilometers at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon
as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the
The ESC OFF switch is located in the center console.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The ⬙ESC OFF Indicator Light⬙ indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially off
or full off.
SAFETY
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
179
WARNING! (Continued)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only
intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other
vehicles.
NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode. Refer to Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in this
section for a complete explanation of the available ESC
modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions,
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
(Continued)
wheel lift or rollover may occur. Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers,
especially those that involve leaving the roadway or
striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure
is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A
feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS
and ESC are in the “Partial Off” mode or the “Full Off”
mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this
section for further information.
5
180 SAFETY
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
The DST function uses the integration of the ESC system
with the electric power steering to increase the safety level
of the whole car. In critical situations (understeering,
oversteering, braking with different grip conditions),
through the DST function the ESC system controls the
steering to implement an additional torque contribution on
the steering wheel, to suggest the most correct maneuver to
the driver. The coordinated action of brakes and steering
increases the safety and car control feeling.
NOTE: The DST is a driving aid system and does not
replace the driver’s actions while driving the car.
Hill Descent Control (Trailhawk)
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in
4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while
descending hills during various driving situations. HDC
controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
SAFETY
181
HDC has three states:
Driver Override:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
brake application at anytime.
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed).
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
Enabling HDC
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
• Vehicle speed exceeds 7.5 mph (12 km/h) but remains
below 25 mph (40 km/h).
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.
• Vehicle speed is below 7.5 mph (12 km/h).
• Electric Park Brake (EPB) is released.
• Driver’s door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled, it will activate automatically if
driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude (greater than
approximately 8%). The set speed for HDC is selectable by
the driver and can be adjusted using brake and throttle
input.
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude
(less than approximately 8%), is on level ground, or is on
an uphill grade.
• Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
• The driver pushes the HDC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.
• Driver’s door opens.
5
182 SAFETY
• The vehicle is driven greater than 25 mph (40 km/h)
(HDC exits immediately.)
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Feedback To The Driver:
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver about
the state HDC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and
remain solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This is
the normal operating condition for HDC.
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
• The switch lamp will flash for several seconds then
extinguish when the driver pushes the HDC switch
when enable conditions have not been met.
The Hill Descent Switch is located within the Selec-Terrain
knob in the upper right position.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
Rear Detection Zones
SAFETY
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode when
the vehicle is in PARK.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function properly. Do not block the radar sensors located on the rear
fascia with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks,
etc.).
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle, 10 ft (3 m). The zone
length starts at the outside mirror and extends approximately 20 ft (6 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle.
The BSM system monitors the detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
5
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
• If a trailer is connected to the vehicle, it is necessary to
deactivate BSM system manually by settings menu to
avoid a misdetection. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
183
Rear Sensor Locations
184 SAFETY
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume. Refer
to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
BSM Warning Light
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
SAFETY
185
Entering From The Rear
Overtaking Traffic
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative speed
of less than 31 mph (50 km/h).
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed less
than 15 mph (25 km/h) and the vehicle remains in the
blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between the
two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (25 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
5
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
186 SAFETY
Overtaking/Passing
Stationary Objects
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your vehicle
does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in adjacent
lanes.
SAFETY
187
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists,
or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the
BSM system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn signal
before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
RCP Detection Zones
5
188 SAFETY
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of the
vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 mph
(2 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
22 mph (35 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will
not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM system
will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view
mirror based on a detected object. However, when the
system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same time, both
the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In addition to
the audible alert, the radio (if on) will also be muted.
SAFETY
NOTE: Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system will respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
189
• A instrument cluster dedicated message will display.
NOTE: The rear bumper must be clean and free of any
obstructing debris.
System Not Available
In the case of the system being temporary unavailable:
• BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on continuously.
Blind Spot Alert Off
• A instrument cluster dedicated message will display.
When the BSM system is turned off, there will be a related
message on instrument cluster display. If BSM system is
off, this message will be visualized every time the vehicle
is restarted.
In the case of the system being completely unavailable:
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
NOTE: Vehicle must be taken to the nearest authorized
dealer for service.
Blind Spot Monitoring Fault Warnings
Sensor Blinded
In the case of a sensor blinded:
• BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on continuously.
• A chime will turn on.
• A instrument cluster dedicated message will display.
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
5
190 SAFETY
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
NOTE:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
• FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other
than an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation — If Equipped
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) System with Mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings, visual
warnings (within the instrument cluster display), and may
apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with enough time to
react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
• If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle
and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system
determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision
by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
Vehicles With A Manual Transmission: After the end of
the intervention of automatic braking, the engine could
stall, unless the driver can depress the clutch pedal.
Vehicles With Automatic Transmission: After the end of
the intervention of automatic braking, the transmission
may remain in last gear stored: therefore the vehicle could
lurch forward, once the brakes release a few seconds later.
If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
SAFETY
191
stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold the
vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release the
brakes.
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
begins at a speed below 20 mph (32 km/h), the system may
provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the
system will hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds
and then release the brakes.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 4 mph
(7 km/h).
• The maximum speed for FCW activation is 124 mph
(200 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
• If the vehicle enters 4WD Low Range, the FCW system
will be automatically deactivated.
• The active braking is enabled only if the front seat belts
are fastened.
FCW Message
• The active braking is disabled when a trailer is connected with a Mopar Trailer Towing system. If the
5
192 SAFETY
vehicle is equipped with an aftermarket system, it is
recommended that the Active Braking is turned off
manually.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
• Changing the FCW status to “Only warning” prevents
the system from providing limited active braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision,
but maintains the audible and visual warnings.
Changing the status of the system is only possible with the
vehicle at a complete stop.
NOTE: The FCW system state is not kept in memory from
one ignition position to the next. If the system is turned off,
it will turn on when the vehicle is restarted.
Changing FCW Sensitivity
Turning FCW On Or Off
The Forward Collision menu setting is located in the
Uconnect settings.
NOTE: The default status of FCW is “Warning + Active
Braking,” this allows the system to warn you of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front of you and enable the
active braking.
• Changing the FCW status to “off” deactivates the system, so no warning or active braking will be available in
case of a possible collision
By changing the settings on the menu of the Uconnect
system, you can change the sensitivity of the system by
choosing one of the following three options: ⬙Near⬙, ⬙Medium⬙ or ⬙Far⬙. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
The default option is ⬙Medium⬙. This setting provides that
the system notify the driver of a possible accident with the
vehicle ahead of it when the latter is at a standard distance,
intermediate between the other two possible settings.
By setting the sensitivity of the system to ⬙Far⬙, the system
will warn the driver of a possible accident with the vehicle
in front when the latter is at a greater distance, giving you
SAFETY
193
the chance to act on the brakes in a more limited and
gradual. This setting gives the driver the maximum possible time of reaction to prevent a possible accident.
Service FCW Warning
By changing the option to ⬙Near⬙, the system will warn the
driver of a possible accident with the vehicle ahead of it
when the latter is a reduced distance. This setting offers a
reaction time to the driver lower than the settings ⬙Medium⬙ and ⬙Far⬙, in the case of a potential accident, while a
more dynamic driving of the vehicle.
• FCW Unavailable Service Required
The setting of the sensitivity of the system is maintained in
memory when the engine is switched off.
The “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”
warning will display when conditions temporarily limit
system performance. This most often occurs at times of
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The system
may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions,
such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument
cluster display will read “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked” and the system will deactivate.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “FCW Limited
Functionality” or “FCW Limited Functionality Wipe Front
Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may
not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the
system performance is no longer present, the system will
return to its full performance state. If the problem persists,
see your authorized dealer.
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster display
reads:
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” Warning
The “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked” message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly
reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and
snow). The system will recover after the vehicle has left
these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning
may temporarily occur.
5
194 SAFETY
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located behind the lower
grille. In absence of visible obstructions on the bumper, it
could be necessary to wipe off the radar directly on the
surface, after having the radar cover removed. It’s recommended that your authorized dealer perform this operation.
Precautions While Driving With FCW
NOTE:
The intervention of the system could be unexpected or
delayed. The driver must therefore always pay particular
attention, while maintaining control of the vehicle to drive
in complete safety.
• If the “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on every
trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized
dealer.
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended.
Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit FCW operation.
In certain driving conditions, such as:
• Driving in the vicinity of a curve
• Small vehicles and/or not aligned to the lane
• Lane changing of other vehicles
• Passing of vehicles in an oncoming intersection
Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve
Entering or exiting a large curve, the system could detect
the presence of a vehicle that is in front of the vehicle, but
that does not preside in the same lane. In cases such as this,
the system might respond.
SAFETY
195
5
Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve
Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane
The system is not able to detect the presence of vehicles
that are in front of the vehicle but placed outside the field
of action of the radar sensor and could therefore not react
in the presence of small vehicles such as bicycles or
motorcycles.
Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane
196 SAFETY
Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles
Vehicles that suddenly change lane, while standing in the
traffic lane of their vehicle and inside the field of action of
the radar sensor may cause the intervention of the system.
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection
General Information
Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection
The system could temporarily react to a vehicle that
crossed the range of the radar sensor, in an oncoming
intersection.
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
SAFETY
2. The device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other
than an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven. This is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
197
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
(Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you
must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold
placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” to turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph
(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
5
198 SAFETY
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 33
psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low
enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to
rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still be on. In this
situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. The TPM sensor is not designed
for use on aftermarket wheels, and may contribute to
a poor overall system performance. Customers are
encouraged to use OEM wheels to assure TPMS
feature operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function
checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
SAFETY
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light”.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect TPMS information on your instrument cluster.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
199
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module.
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE
PRESSURE” message will display in the instrument cluster,
an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will be displayed and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. Should this occur, you should stop as
soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on
your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in the
⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the
5
200 SAFETY
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph
(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound
a chime. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. The “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off when the fault
condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur due to
any of the following:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare or non-Matching Full Size
Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size spare
tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below
the low-pressure warning limit, a chime will sound and
the “TPMS Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE PRESSURE”
and ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ messages will turn on upon the next
ignition cycle.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15.5 mph (25 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
SAFETY
201
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime will sound
and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare or
non-matching full size spare, the TPMS will update
automatically and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn
off, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
Tire Pressure Monitor System Operation
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module.
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the instrument cluster.
5
202 SAFETY
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster
will display a ⬙Tire Low⬙ message for a minimum of five
seconds and a graphic showing the pressure values of each
tire with the low tire pressure values in a different color.
in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in the
⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the pressure values in the graphic display in the
instrument cluster will return to their original color, and
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
Service TPMS Warning
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a different color
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound
a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
SAFETY
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message will no longer display, and a pressure value will
display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due
to any of the following:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Matching Full-Size Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, a
203
chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will
turn on upon the next ignition key cycle. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a Tire Low message, an
⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message and a graphic showing the low
tire pressure value in a different color.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15.5 mph (25 km/h) the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn
OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the lowpressure warning limit in any of the four active road
tires.
4. The instrument cluster will display a graphic showing
the tire pressure value in the same color as the other
pressure values in place of the different color low tire
pressure value. The instrument cluster will also display
a “SPARE LOW PRESSURE” message to remind you to
service the flat tire.
Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching Full Size
Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching full size does
not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore,
the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact
spare tire.
5
204 SAFETY
2. If you install the compact or non-matching full size
spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below
the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition
key cycle, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will remain on and
a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the
instrument cluster will still display a different color
pressure value and an ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15.5 mph (25 km/h), the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the
instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then display dashes
(- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare or
non-matching full size, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the “TPMS Telltale Light” will turn off
and the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15.5 mph
(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
SAFETY
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
205
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) should be secured in a vehicle
with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning
booster seats. Older children who do not use child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride
properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
5
206 SAFETY
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Customer Assistance” section for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
SAFETY
207
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
5
208 SAFETY
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
SAFETY
209
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt
is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your
authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
(Continued)
5
210 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
SAFETY
211
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
5
212 SAFETY
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and
move it up or down to the position that serves you best.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the
shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button.
To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
WARNING!
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
SAFETY
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
213
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt
in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that
is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
5
214 SAFETY
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
SAFETY
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)
215
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
5
216 SAFETY
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the AVV/START or MAR/ACC/
ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the
STOP/OFF/LOCK position the air bag system is not on
and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is in the MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
SAFETY
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
217
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately. For additional information
regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light, refer to
“Warning/Indicator Lights And Messages” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” section of this manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag
covers.
5
218 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
(Continued)
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
SAFETY
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
(Continued)
219
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
5
220 SAFETY
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side
of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The
front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs): Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs
are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label
sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
SAFETY
221
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events,
in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by
the seat belts and body structure.
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
5
222 SAFETY
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs):
Located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
• Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough
to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the SABIC
and its deployment path are located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
side impact or rollover event is appropriate, based on the
SAFETY
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
223
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side
Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
5
224 SAFETY
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The
rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In
the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover
event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate,
the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
SAFETY
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
225
5
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
226 SAFETY
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response System.
• Unlock the power door locks.
• Turn off the Fuel Pump Heater — If Equipped.
• Turn off the HVAC Blower Motor.
• Close the HVAC Circulation Door.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
After the event occurs, when the system is active, a
message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/ACC/
ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check
the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank
before resetting the system and starting the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn
signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may both be
blinking and will continue to blink. In order to move your
vehicle to the side of the road, you must follow the system
reset procedure.
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE: Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
1. Turn ignition STOP/
OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal
Must be placed in Neutral
State).
2. Turn ignition MAR/
Right turn light BLINKS.
SAFETY
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE: Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
ACC/ON/RUN.
Left turn light is OFF.
3. Turn right turn signal
Right turn light is ON
switch ON.
SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
4. Place turn signal in
Right turn light is OFF.
neutral state.
Left turn light BLINKS.
5. Turn left turn signal
Right turn light BLINKS.
switch ON.
Left turn light is ON
SOLID.
6. Place turn signal in
Right turn light BLINKS.
neutral state.
Left turn light is OFF.
7. Turn right turn signal
Right turn light is ON
switch ON.
SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
8. Place turn signal in
Right turn light is OFF.
neutral state.
Left turn light BLINKS.
9. Turn left turn signal
Right turn light is ON
switch ON.
SOLID.
Left turn light is ON
Customer Action
227
Customer Will See
NOTE: Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
SOLID.
10. Turn left turn signal
Right turn light is OFF.
switch OFF. (Turn Signal
Left turn light is OFF.
Switch Must be placed in
Neutral State).
11. Turn ignition STOP/
OFF/LOCK.
12. Turn ignition MAR/
System is now reset and
the engine may be started.
ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire
sequence needs to be
completed within one
minute or sequence will
need to be repeated).
Turn hazard flashers OFF
(Manually).
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60
seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset
procedure must be performed again in order to be successful.
5
228 SAFETY
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side
of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
(Continued)
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact your
authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
SAFETY
• These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
229
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any
child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper
restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
5
230 SAFETY
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/
parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website
for
additional
information:
http://
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Children who are at least two years
old or who have out-grown the
height or weight limit of their rearfacing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
SAFETY
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rearfacing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
231
Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
5
232 SAFETY
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing
limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat
until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s
back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are
held in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with a seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or
remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way
back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm?
SAFETY
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
233
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
5
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Seat Belt + Top
Anchors Only
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Tether Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
234 SAFETY
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
(29.5 kg)
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Seat Belt + Top
Anchors Only
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Tether Anchor
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
LATCH Label
X
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
SAFETY
235
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
5
LATCH Positions
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
236 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system
weight + weight of the child reuntil the combined weight of the
straint) for using the LATCH anchorchild and the child restraint is 65 lbs
age system to attach the child re(29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
straint?
anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the
No
Do not use the seat belt when you
use the LATCH anchorage system to
seat belt be used together to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child
attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
restraint?
child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the
LATCH anchorages if allowed by the
booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for
more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the
No
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to
center position using the inner
install a child seat in the center seatLATCH lower anchorage?
ing position.
SAFETY
237
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can two child restraints be attached
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage
using a common lower LATCH anwith two or more child restraints. If
chorage?
the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat
in the center position next to a child
seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
the front passenger seat if the child
seat?
restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
The head restraints may be removed
in every rear seating position.
5
238 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You
will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
A — Lower Anchorage Location
SAFETY
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat.
239
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rearfacing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING!
Tether Anchorage Locations
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
• Do not install a child restraint in the center position
using the LATCH system. This position is not approved for installing child seats using the LATCH
attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center seating
position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “To Install A
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint” for typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
5
240 SAFETY
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
SAFETY
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
241
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional
information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
5
242 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child reusing the seat belt to install a forstraint) for using the Tether Anchor
ward facing child restraint, up to the
with the seat belt to attach a forward
recommended weight limit of the
facing child restraint?
child restraint.
SAFETY
243
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
Contact between the front passenger
touch the back of the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is alseat?
lowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
The head restraintscan be removed in
each seating position.
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
seating position with an ALR retractor.
path of the child restraint?
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
5
244 SAFETY
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage:
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
245
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and
pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the
head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
5
246 SAFETY
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
Rear Seat Tether Anchors
NOTE: Never transport passengers in the cargo area.
WARNING!
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
(Continued)
SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
247
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
5
248 SAFETY
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If
the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Safety”
for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
your floor mat using the
• ALWAYS securely attach
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
before installing any other
FROM THE VEHICLE
floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor mat
for the specific make, model, and year of your vehicle.
(Continued)
SAFETY
249
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and reinstalled, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
(Continued)
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
5
250 SAFETY
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected, or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING THE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
▫ Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
▫ Tip Start Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Downshifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
䡵 NINE-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . .265
▫ Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Gear Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
▫ Extended Park Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ After Starting — Warming Up The Engine . . . . .256
▫ Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Stopping The Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
▫ Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Turbocharger “Cool Down” — If Equipped . . . .256
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . . .273
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .256
䡵 POWER STEERING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
䡵 ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB) . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
䡵 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Auto Park Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ SafeHold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ Setting A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ Brake Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Varying The Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
▫ Accelerating For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
6
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ Deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
䡵 REAR PARKSENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Rear ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
▫ Enabling And Disabling Rear ParkSense . . . . . . .279
▫ Common Towing Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
▫ Service The Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .280
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
▫ LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
▫ Turning LaneSense On Or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
▫ LaneSense Warning Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
▫ Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
䡵 REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED . . . .288
䡵 FOUR WHEEL DRIVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
▫ Four Wheel Drive (4x4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
䡵 SELEC-TERRAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Mode Selection Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
▫ Towing Tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . .308
▫ Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
䡵 DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
▫ On-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
▫ Off-Road Driving Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
STARTING THE ENGINE
Manual Transmission
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
Proceed as follows:
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
1. Set the Electric Park Brake (EPB) and put the gear
selector in the NEUTRAL position.
2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor, without pressing the
accelerator.
3. Cycle the ignition to the START mode and release it as
soon as the engine is started.
4. If the engine does not start, place the ignition in the OFF
mode and wait 10-15 seconds before attempting to
restart the engine.
Automatic Transmission
Proceed as follows:
1. Set the Electric Park Brake (EPB) and put the gear
selector in the PARK or NEUTRAL position.
2. Press on the brake pedal, without pressing the accelerator.
3. Cycle the ignition to the START mode and release it as
soon as the engine is started.
6
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. If the engine does not start, place the ignition in the OFF
mode and wait 10-15 seconds before attempting to
restart the engine.
the accelerator pedal and repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
WARNING!
Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Cycle the ignition switch
briefly to the START mode and release it. The starter motor
will continue to run but will automatically disengage when
the engine is running.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the
vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious
personal injury.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
⬙Normal Starting⬙ or ⬙Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedure,
and has not experienced an extended park condition as
identified in ⬙Extended Park Starting⬙ procedure it may be
flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than 15
seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded. Leave the ignition RUN mode, release
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery
or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump-Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time.
Wait 60 seconds before trying again.
Cold Weather Operation
To ensure reliable starting under extreme cold conditions
an externally powered electric block heater (available from
your authorized dealer) is required for the 1.4L Turbo
engine below -20°F (-29°C) and for the 2.4L engine below
-31°F (-35°C) and is recommended for the 2.4L engine
below -20°F (-29°C).
To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low
temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking
when the ambient temperature is less than -20°F (-29°C) for
the 1.4L Turbo engine, and -31°F (-35°C) for the 2.4L engine,
and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine
block heater has not been used. The message “plug in
engine heater” will be displayed in the instrument cluster
when the ambient temperature is below -4°F (-20°C) at the
time the engine is shut off as a reminder to avoid possible
crank delays at the next cold start.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
2. Cycle the ignition to the START mode and release it
when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 to 15 seconds, cycle
the ignition to the OFF mode, wait five seconds to allow
the starter to cool, then repeat the Extended Park
Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow the
starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat the
procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
6
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine
Proceed as follows:
• Travel slowly, letting the engine run at a reduced RPM,
without accelerating suddenly.
• It is recommended to wait until the engine coolant
temperature gauge starts to rise for maximum performance.
Stopping The Engine
To shut off the engine with vehicle speed greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), you must push and hold the ignition or
push the START/STOP button three times consecutively
within a few seconds. The engine will shut down, and the
ignition will be placed in the RUN position.
Turning OFF the car (cycle the ignition from the RUN
mode to the OFF mode), the power supply to the accessories are maintained for a period of three minutes.
Opening the driver side door with the ignition in RUN will
sound a short chime that reminds the driver to place the
ignition to OFF.
When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the window
switches remains active for three minutes. Opening a front
door will cancel this function.
After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the temperature inside the engine compartment to cool before shutting
off the engine.
Turbocharger “Cool Down” — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool the
turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending on the
type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump will run
for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been shut off to
circulate coolant through the turbocharger. Although the
pump is rubber-mounted for quiet operation, it is normal
to hear it running during this time.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Dealer
Service” in “Servicing And Maintenance”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is applied. Also,
be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
The EPB switch is located in the center console.
You can engage the EPB in two ways;
• Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
• Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake feature
in the customer programmable features section of the
Uconnect settings or in “Safe Hold” conditions.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem.
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park Brake
System (EPB) that offers simple operation, and some
additional features that make the parking brake more
convenient and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the
vehicle from rolling while parked. Before leaving the
Electric Park Brake Switch
6
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
To apply the EPB manually, pull up on the switch momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring sound from the back
of the vehicle while the EPB engages. Once the parking
brake is fully engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster and an indicator on the switch will
illuminate. If your foot is on the brake pedal while you
apply the EPB, you may notice a small amount of brake
pedal movement. The EPB can be applied even when the
ignition is in the OFF mode however, it can only be
released when the ignition is in the RUN mode.
NOTE: The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 60 seconds in either the
released or applied position. The light will extinguish upon
releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the EPB will
automatically engage whenever the transmission is moved
into PARK, or with a manual transmission, when the
ignition switch is in the STOP/OFF position. If your foot is
on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount of
brake pedal movement while the EPB is engaging.
The electric park brake will be automatically released if the
driver’s seat belt is buckled (only in case of automatic
transmission) and driver’s intention to start (in forward or
reverse direction) is recognized by the system
To release the EPB manually, the ignition must be in the
RUN mode. Put your foot on the brake pedal, then push
the EPB switch down momentarily. You may hear a slight
whirring sound from the back of the car while the parking
brake disengages. You may also notice a small amount of
movement in the brake pedal. Once the EPB is fully
disengaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument
cluster and the LED indicator on the switch will extinguish.
NOTE:
• When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the EPB before
placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The EPB
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in
the vehicle.
• If the clutch pedal is released at the same time the gas
pedal is pressed, the EPB will be automatically released
(manual transmissions only).
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to
engage the EPB while the vehicle is in motion, maintain
upward pressure on the EPB switch for as long as engagement is desired. The brake warning lamp could illuminate
in case of the hydraulic system is not available. The rear
stop lamps will also be illuminated automatically while the
vehicle remains in motion.
To disengage the EPB while the vehicle is in motion, release
the switch. If the vehicle is brought to a complete stop
using the EPB, when the vehicle reaches approximately
1.9 mph (3 km/h) the EPB will remain engaged.
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or
repeated use of the parking brake to slow the vehicle
may cause serious damage to the brake system. Be sure
(Continued)
6
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving;
failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB system, a
yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate. This may be accompanied by the Brake warning lamp flashing. In this status
some EPB functionalities may be deactivated. In this event,
urgent service of the EPB system is required. Do not rely on
the EPB to hold the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The EPB can be programmed to be applied automatically
whenever the vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h) and
the automatic transmission is placed in PARK, or with a
manual transmission, whenever the ignition is in the OFF
mode. Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled by customer selection through the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect Settings.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be bypassed
by pushing the EPB switch to the release position while the
transmission is placed in PARK (automatic transmission)
and the ignition is in the RUN mode. In some cases, with
an automatic transmission, if at the cycle of key from RUN
to the OFF mode the gear selector is not firmly locked in
Parking position, EPB applies automatically even if Auto
Park Brake has been previously disabled.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that will
engage the park brake automatically if the vehicle is left
unsecured while the ignition is in the RUN mode.
For automatic transmissions, the EPB will automatically
engage if all of the following conditions are met:
• Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
• There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
• The seat belt is unbuckled.
• The driver door is open.
• The vehicle is not in the PARK position.
For manual transmissions, the EPB will automatically
engage if all of the following conditions are met:
• Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
• There is no attempt to depress the brake pedal or
accelerator pedal.
• The clutch pedal is not pressed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
• The seat belt is unbuckled.
• The driver door is open.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing the EPB
Switch while the driver door is open and the brake pedal is
pressed. Once manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or
the ignition is cycled to the OFF mode and back to RUN
again.
Service Mode has requirements that must be met in order
to be activated:
• The vehicle must be at a standstill.
• The parking brake must be disabled.
• The transmission must be in park or neutral.
• The EPB switch not activated.
• The vehicle in ignition RUN mode.
Brake Service Mode
• The brake pedal not pressed.
We recommend having your brakes serviced by your
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. You
should only enter Brake Service Mode during brake service.
While in service mode, the EPB fault lamp will flash
continuously while the ignition is in the RUN mode.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be necessary for
you or your technician to push the rear piston into the rear
caliper bore. With the electric park brake system, this can
only be done after retracting the EPB actuator. The actuator
retraction can be done easily by entering the Brake Service
Mode through the Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. This
menu based system will guide you through the steps
necessary to retract the EPB actuator in order to perform
rear brake service.
NOTE: A dedicated message will appear in the instrument
cluster if Brake Service Mode cannot be activated.
When brake service work is complete, the following steps
must be followed to reset the parking brake system to
normal operation:
• Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
• Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
• Apply the EPB Switch.
6
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: A dedicated message will appear in the instrument
cluster if Brake Service Mode cannot be deactivated.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle
unattended without having the parking brake fully
applied. The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an
incline.
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal,
or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch
pedal partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal
wear on the clutch.
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms
up. This is normal.
To shift the gears, press the clutch pedal to the floor and
put the gear selector to the desired position (the diagram
for the engagement of the gears is displayed on the handle
of the lever).
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal.
You should always use first gear when starting from a
standing position.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
REVERSE Ring
To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL position, lift
the REVERSE ring, located below the knob and simultaneously move the lever to the left and then forward.
All Engines
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel
economy and performance, it should be upshifted as listed
in the recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the vehicle
speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily loaded or
pulling a trailer, these recommended up-shift speeds may
not apply.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Gear Selection
2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
Accel.
24 (39)
34 (55)
47 (76)
Cruise
19 (31)
27 (43)
37 (60)
5 to 6
56 (90)
41 (66)
6
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
Downshifting
CAUTION! (Continued)
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recommended to preserve brakes when driving down steep hills.
In addition, downshifting at the right time provides better
acceleration when you desire to resume speed. Downshift
progressively. Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the
engine and clutch.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip, and the vehicle could skid.
which can cause engine damage, and/or clutch damage, even if the clutch pedal is pressed. If transfer
case is in low range the vehicle speeds to cause
engine and clutch damage are significantly lower.
• Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine damage and/or
damage the clutch, even if the clutch pedal is
pressed.
• Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal
depressed could result in clutch damage.
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
• Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears at
higher vehicle speeds can damage the engine and
clutch systems, Any attempt to shift into lower gear
with clutch pedal depressed may result damage to
the clutch system. Shifting into lower gear and
releasing the clutch may result in engine damage.
• When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift
one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine
Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed
and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch pedal
is pressed.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
Gear Selection
Maximum Speed
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
6 to 5
5 to 4
4 to 3
3 to 2
80 (129)
70 (113)
50 (81)
30 (48)
CAUTION!
If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift at
too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may cause
the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is selected
and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to the clutch
and the transmission can result from skipping a gear
while downshifting or downshifting at too high of a
vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal is held pressed
(i.e., not released).
NINE-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art, fuel
efficient nine-speed transmission.
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed beside
the gear selector and in the instrument cluster display. To
2 to 1
15 (24)
select a gear range, push the lock button on the gear
selector and move the selector rearward or forward. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission
out of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds (refer to ⬙Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System⬙ in this section). Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are selfcalibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
6
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and
turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the
OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
Gear Selector
The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-) shift positions. Manual
shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control (refer
to “AutoStick” in this section for further information).
Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while
in the AutoStick position (beside the DRIVE position) will
manually select the transmission gear, and will display the
current gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward)
it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear
(1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move
the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position)
for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
6
Gear Selector Lock Button
The nine-speed transmission has been developed to meet
the needs of FCA current and future lineup of FWD/AWD
vehicles. Software and calibration is refined to optimize the
customer’s driving experience and fuel economy. By design, some vehicle and drive-line combinations utilize 9th
gear only in very specific driving situations and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
CAUTION!
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold.
Gear Ranges
PARK (P)
This range supplements the Electric Park Brake (EPB) by
locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this
range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the EPB when leaving the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the EPB.
When parking on a hill, apply the EPB before shifting the
transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the
gear selector out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn
the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and
away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the ignition OFF.
• Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
transmission gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and
turn the ignition OFF. When the ignition is in the
OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
(Continued)
the ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the
gear selector, and firmly move the gear selector all the
way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not
blinking.
6
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
• With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the electric park brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds or while
towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control
(refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further information)
to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a
lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
limits, the transmission controller may modify the transmission shift schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement.
This is done to prevent transmission damage due to
overheating.
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also
provide you with more control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing and many other situations.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Transmission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and the
transmission may operate differently until the transmission
cools down.
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position (beside
the DRIVE position), it can be moved forward and rearward. This allows the driver to manually select the transmission gear being used. Moving the gear selector forward
(-) triggers a downshift, and rearward (+) an upshift. The
current gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter
clutch, and shifts into 8th or 9th gear, are inhibited until the
transmission fluid is warm. Normal operation will resume
once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable
level.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control, giving you more control of the
vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking,
Operation
NOTE: In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only shift
up or down when the driver moves the gear selector
rearward (+) or forward (-), except as described below.
• The transmission will automatically upshift when necessary to prevent engine overspeed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first or
second gear (depending on model) when coming to a
6
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+)
the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out (from a stop) in first or second gear.
Starting out in second gear can be helpful in snow or icy
conditions. Tap the gear selector forward or rearward to
select the desired gear after the vehicle is brought to a
stop.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
overspeed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of
a vehicle speed.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged
because the transmission will not shift automatically.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault
or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to
the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick
position at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is electronically monitored for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift
the transmission to NEUTRAL.
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns
OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. If
the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service
is required.
Ignition Park Interlock
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go:
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock,
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the OFF mode. Also, the transmission is locked in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
OFF mode.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be in the RUN
mode (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be
pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed before pushing the
button on the gear selector to shift from NEUTRAL into
DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light
efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the
electric steering system experiences a fault that reduces
assist or prevents the vehicle from providing assist, you
will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually.
6
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING⬙ OR
⬙POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE
SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon are
displayed on the instrument cluster screen, it
indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering
assistance. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — On/Off
2 — SET+/Accel
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET-/Decel
5 — CANC/Cancel
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
NOTE:
Setting A Desired Speed
• In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed Control
System has been designed to shut down if multiple
Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated
by pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.
Turn the Speed Control on.
• The Speed Control function will not work in 4WD Low
Range.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-)
button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
Activation
Varying The Speed
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control. The
Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster display
will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off
button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn
off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
To Increase Speed
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect system if equipped. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
6
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
Accelerating For Passing
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect system if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
Resume Speed
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
Deactivation
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button,
or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed
from memory.
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 59
inches (150 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition to OFF
erases the set speed from memory.
REAR PARKSENSE — IF EQUIPPED
6
The Rear ParkSense system provides visual and audible
indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a
detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking
maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions”
for limitations of this system and recommendations.
Rear ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the RUN position.
Rear ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is
in REVERSE.
Rear ParkSense Sensors
The four Rear ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
Parking Sensors
Chime
By shifting the vehicle in REVERSE and in the case of the
presence of a rear obstacle, an acoustic signal that varies
with the distance of the obstacle from the bumper is
activated.
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
The frequency of the acoustic signal:
Instrument Cluster Display
• Increases with the distance between vehicle and object
decreases.
Rear ParkSense is displayed on the instrument cluster only
if you have selected the item ⬙Beep and Display⬙ inside the
⬙Settings⬙ menu of the Uconnect system.
• Becomes continuous when the distance that separates
the vehicle from the obstacle is less than approximately
12 inches (30 cm), while terminates immediately if the
distance to the obstacle increases.
• Remains constant if the distance between vehicle and
obstacle remains unchanged. If this situation occurs for
the side sensors, the signal is stopped after approximately three seconds to avoid, for example, it activates
in case of maneuver along a wall.
When the system emits a beeping sound, the volume of the
Uconnect system, if turned on, is automatically lowered by
Rear ParkSense.
Detection Distances
If the sensors detect more obstacles, it is taken into account
only what is the shorter distance.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear region
and will produce a one-half second tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound tone
will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left
and/or right rear region and will produce a fast sound
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the tone will change from fast to continuous.
In general, the vehicle is closest to the obstacle when the
display shows only a flashing arc and the chime becomes
continuous.
The color on the display depends on the distance and
location of the obstacle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
Enabling And Disabling Rear ParkSense
Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the Rear
ParkSense switch.
When the Rear ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster display will show a message such as “PARKSENSE
DISABLED” for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The Rear ParkSense switch LED will be on when Rear
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The Rear ParkSense
switch LED will be off when the system is enabled. If the
Rear ParkSense switch is pushed, and requires service, the
Rear ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then
the LED will be on.
Rear ParkSense will remember the previous state when the
vehicle is switch off.
CAUTION!
After turning OFF the ignition, the Rear ParkSense
remains in this setting until the next ignition cycle,
even in the case of changing the setting of starting
RUN to OFF and then again in RUN.
Service The Rear ParkSense System
During vehicle start up, when the Rear ParkSense System
has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster
will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it
will display a message such as “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” for further information. When the gear
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected
a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will
show a message such as ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ for approximately five seconds.
Under this condition, Rear ParkSense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
appears in the instrument cluster display, make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper
6
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstructions and then cycle the ignition. if the message continues
to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the
rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or
other obstruction to keep the Rear ParkSense system
operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of Rear ParkSense.
• Clean the Rear ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The Rear ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
fascia/bumper.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be placed
within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper
while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in
the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing a failure indication to be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
WARNING! (Continued)
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
If it’s necessary to keep the trailer hitch and hitch ball
assembly mounted for a long period, it is possible to filter
out the trailer hitch and hitch ball assembly presence in
sensor field of view. The filtering operation must be
performed only by an authorized dealer.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to detect
lane markings and measure vehicle position within the
lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warning
in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If
the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the lane,
the LaneSense system provides a visual warning through
the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no turn
6
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual
warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single
lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not
be provided.
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on
the steering wheel and provides an audible warning to the
driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on the
steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does
not return their hands to the wheel.
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state on or off from the last ignition cycle when the ignition
is changed to the RUN position.
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the instrument cluster display.
Base Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
The default status of LaneSense is off.
The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel below
the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense button (LED turns off). A “Lane Sense On”
message is shown in the instrument cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense
button once (LED turns on).
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense telltale
is solid white when only the left lane marking has been
detected and the system is ready to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left thin
line remains solid white and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
6
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick
Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale is
solid green when both lane markings have been detected
and the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
the instrument cluster display and a torque warning in
the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure
occurs.
Lane Sensed (Solid White Thick Line, Solid White Thin
Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation,
the left thick lane line and the left thin line turn solid
white. The LaneSense telltale changes from solid green
to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane, the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes from white to gray, the left thin
line remains solid white and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time, torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane, the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
6
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick Line,
Solid White Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense telltale
is solid white when only the left lane marking has been
detected and the system is ready to provide visual
warnings in the instrument cluster display if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin line
remains solid yellow and the LaneSense telltale changes
from solid white to flashing yellow.
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
the instrument cluster display and a torque warning in
the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure
occurs.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale is
solid green when both lane markings have been detected
and the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation,
the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid yellow.
The LaneSense telltale changes from solid green to solid
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
6
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin
Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the left
thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin
line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes
from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque
is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction
of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity of
the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity
(early/late) that you can configure through the Uconnect
system screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
traction control system, electronic stability control, forward collision warning, etc.).
REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED
The Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an on-screen
image of your vehicle’s rear surroundings when the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
on the touchscreen display along with a note to “Check
Entire Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five
seconds, this note will disappear. The camera is located
above the rear license plate.
Parking Camera
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited and the
navigation or audio screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned on), the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h),
the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched
to the OFF position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
A touchscreen button to disable the camera is available
when the vehicle is not in REVERSE or if touchscreen
button “X” at the top of the camera screen is pressed.
Display of the camera image after shifting out of REVERSE
can be disabled via Uconnect Settings.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position.
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
the safety of your surroundings and must continue to
pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
6
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back Up Camera
should only be used as a parking aid. The Rear Back
Up Camera is unable to view every obstacle or object
in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using the Rear Back Up Camera to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently over
his/her shoulder when using the Rear Back Up
Camera.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle input
(where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be sent to
the rear in a preemptive effort to improve vehicle launch
and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire size
may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
Four Wheel Drive (4x4)
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE
The four wheel drive (4WD) is fully automatic in normal
driving mode.
Jeep Active Drive (4WD) And Jeep Active Drive Low
(4WD Low)
NOTE: It is not possible to carry out the change of mode
when the vehicle exceeds the speed of 75 mph (120 km/h).
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Power Transfer Unit
(PTU). This system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required. Under normal driving
conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction. If
the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front
wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the
rear wheels.
Enabling Four Wheel Drive (4x4)
The buttons for the activation of four wheel drive are
located on the device Selec-Terrain and allow you to select
the following:
• 4WD LOCK
• 4WD LOW — (Trailhawk models only)
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
Active Drive Control — If Equipped
Active Drive With Low Control — (Trailhawk Models
Only)
6
Selec-Terrain Switch
The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) is locked to ensure immediate availability of torque to the rear drive axles. This
feature is selectable in AUTO mode and automatic in the
other driving mode. 4WD LOCK can be enabled by the
following ways:
• When the 4WD LOCK button is pushed.
• When the Selec-Terrain switch is rotated from AUTO to
any other off-road modes.
Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk)
The 4WD LOW mode helps to improve the off-road
performance in all modes. To enable 4WD Low, please
follow the steps below:
Enabling 4WD LOW
With the vehicle stationary, the ignition in RUN mode or
with the engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and push the button once 4WD LOW. The instrument cluster will display the message ⬙4WD LOW⬙ once
the shift is complete.
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Both LOCK and LOW LEDs will blink and then become
active on the Selec-Terrain switch until the shift is
complete.
• The instrument cluster display will illuminate the ⬙4WD
Low⬙ icon.
Disabling 4WD LOW
To disable the 4WD LOW mode, the vehicle must be
stationary and the transmission shifted into NEUTRAL.
Push the 4WD LOW button once.
SELEC-TERRAIN
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the vehicle control systems, along with driver input, to provide the best
performance for all terrains.
Mode Selection Guide
Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the desired mode.
Selec-Terrain Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
use second gear (rather than first gear) during launches,
to minimize wheel slippage, except for in 4–Low (Trailhawk models only).
• SAND: For off-road driving or use on surfaces with poor
traction, such as sandy bottoms. The transmission is set
to provide maximum traction. This mode allows more
wheel spin and higher shift points to help motor
through loose areas.
• MUD: For off-road driving or use on surfaces with poor
traction, such as roads covered by mud or wet grass.
Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk)
• AUTO: This four-wheel drive operation is a continuous
operation, is fully automatic and can be used on and off
road. This mode balances traction to ensure maneuverability and acceleration improvement compared to a
vehicle with two wheel drive. This mode also reduces
fuel consumption, since it allows the disconnect of the
drive shaft where conditions permit.
• SNOW: This mode allows you to have greater stability
under conditions of bad weather. It’s used on and off
road and on surfaces with poor traction, such as roads
covered with snow. When in SNOW mode (depending
on certain operating conditions), the transmission will
• ROCK (Trailhawk only): This mode is only available in
4WD LOW range. The device sets the vehicle to maximize traction and allow the highest steering capacity for
off-road surfaces. This mode gives you the maximum
performance off-road. Use for low speed obstacles such
as large rocks, deep ruts, etc.
NOTE:
• Rock mode is only available on the vehicles equipped
with the Trailhawk package.
• Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec Speed Control
for steep downhill control. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control System” in “Safety” for further information.
6
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
The Capless Fuel System uses a flapper placed at the filler
pipe of the fuel tank; it opens and closes automatically
upon insertion/extraction of the fuel nozzle.
• Insert the fuel nozzle in the filler pipe and proceed with
filling the fuel tank.
The Capless Fuel System is designed so that it prevents the
filling of an incorrect type of fuel.
Opening The Door
For filling proceed as follows:
• Open the door, by pushing and releasing on the indentation point indicated by the arrow.
Filling Procedure
• Before removing the nozzle, wait at least 10 seconds to
allow the fuel to flow inside of the tank.
• Pull the nozzle from the filler pipe and then close the
door.
Fuel Filler Door
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
Emergency Refueling Procedure
If the vehicle is out of fuel proceed as follows:
• Open the liftgate and remove the emergency fuel fill
funnel located in the cargo area.
6
Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel – If Equipped With Full Size
Spare Tire
• Open the fuel door.
Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel
• Insert the emergency fuel fill funnel in the filler pipe and
proceed to fill the fuel tank.
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle and may cause pressure increases inside the
tank, creating dangerous conditions.
• Do not approach the neck of the tank with open
flames or lit cigarettes its an extreme fire hazard.
Also, avoid close contact with the filler pipe with
your face, do not inhale harmful vapors.
• Do not use your mobile phone in the vicinity of the
pump fuel nozzle, it can be a possible risk of fire.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
Fueling With Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel
• Remove the emergency fuel fill funnel, and close the
door.
• Store the emergency fuel fill funnel in the cargo area.
WARNING!
• Do not to affix objects/plugs to the end of the filler
neck other than is provided on the car.
• The use of objects/plugs do not comply with the
(Continued)
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Tire Size
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
6
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be
determined separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the
vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear
axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to
rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified
weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down
low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with
your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight.
The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed
the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for
operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of
the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control — Mechanical
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
6
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and they
are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway
control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and trailer
configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the
maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow
and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct
trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
1.4L Turbo Engine
Trailer towing is not recommended.
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight
ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note)
2.4L
2,000 lbs (900 kg)
200 lbs (90 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further information.
6
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for
your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
Towing Requirements
WARNING! (Continued)
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended:
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load
shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage
to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
(Continued)
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross
the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. Always block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
6
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer
is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine
and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Serving And Maintenance” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before
towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Serving And Maintenance” for the proper inspection
procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Serving And Maintenance” for the proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have a collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
(If Equipped)
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer
to the following illustrations.
6
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
before launching a boat (or any other device plugged
into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.
• Be sure to reconnect after clear from water area.
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and
backing the trailer in an area located away from heavy
traffic.
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Speed Control — If Equipped
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The transmission
controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting
when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur
while in DRIVE, you can use the AutoStick shift control to
manually select a lower gear.
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat build up. This action will also provide better
engine braking.
AutoStick
• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3”
if needed to maintain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary
to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
6
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
TOWING CONDITION
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
WHEELS OFF THE
GROUND
NONE
REAR
FRONT
ALL
FRONT WHEEL DRIVE
(FWD)
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
BEST METHOD
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
(4WD)
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOTE:
Recreational Towing
• When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable
state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial
Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Models With Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent
Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake
feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow
dolly (front wheels off the ground) or vehicle trailer (all
four wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly, follow this
procedure:
• Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
• Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
• Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB). Place the transmission in PARK. Turn the engine OFF.
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
• Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
• Turn the ignition to the RUN mode, but do not start the
engine.
• Press and hold the brake pedal.
Models With Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground, or
using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. This vehicle may
be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four
wheels are OFF the ground.
• Release the Electric Park Brake (EPB).
• Turn the ignition OFF, and release the brake pedal.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires towing,
make sure the drive wheels are OFF the ground.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DRIVING TIPS
On-Road Driving Tips
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide
variety of off-road applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than conventional passenger cars.
6
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in offroad conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle
rollover.
Off-Road Driving Tips
When To Use 4WD LOW Range
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for additional
traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain, ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase low-speed
pulling power (refer to “All Wheel Drive and Four-Wheel
Drive Operation” in this section for further details). This
range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep
snow, mud, or sand where additional low speed pulling
power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph
(40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4WD LOW range.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water,
there are a number of precautions that must be considered
before entering the water:
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering as
a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving
through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must drive through
water, try to determine the depth and the bottom condition
(and location of any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed
with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less
than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water to minimize wave
effects.
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
Flowing Water
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off)
avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the
flow rate is reduced. If you must cross flowing-water,
avoid depths in excess of 9 inches (22 cm). The flowing
water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink
into deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting.
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the 4WD system to the appropriate terrain
mode, using 4WD LOW if necessary. Refer to “Four Wheel
Drive” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to
maintain headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the
wheels and traction will be lost.
Standing Water — Trailhawk Only
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 19 inches (48
cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave
effects. Maximum speed in 19 inches (48 cm) of water is
less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine, transmission, Power Transfer
Unit and Rear Drive Module) to assure they have not been
contaminated. Contaminated fluids and lubricants (milky,
foamy in appearance) should be flushed/changed as soon
as possible to prevent component damage.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads because
engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the 4WD System to 4WD LOW. Use
first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
6
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and
immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine and shift
to REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the
compression braking of the engine to help regulate your
speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle speed,
apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt
to turn around. To do so may result in tipping and
rolling the vehicle. Always back straight down a hill in
REVERSE gear carefully. Never back down a hill in
NEUTRAL using only the brake.
NOTE: Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill,
ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning
the front wheels slowly left and right. This may provide a
fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually provide
traction to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the 4WD System
to 4WD LOW range or Select Hill Descent Control if
equipped (refer to ⬙Electronic Brake Control System⬙ in this
section for further information). Let the vehicle go slowly
down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine
compression drag. This will permit you to control the
vehicle speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking can
cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission
whenever possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can
get any problems taken care of right away and have your
vehicle ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things
could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel
lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar
dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake rotors,
wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel
imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the
situation.
6
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . .353
䡵 ASSIST AND 9-1-1 — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .317
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
▫ Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .361
▫ Replacing Exterior Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
▫ Replacing Interior Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . . .361
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . . . .363
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ Replacing The Sealant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
▫ Access To The Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
䡵 JUMP STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
▫ Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution Unit . .343
▫ Preparations For Jump Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
▫ Body Computer Fuse Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ Jump Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
▫ Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit . . . . . .351
䡵 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . . .353
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
7
316 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
▫ Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . . . . . . .373
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . .371
▫ Front Wheel Drive (FWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
▫ Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . .375
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 317
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the switch
bank below the radio.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic
of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off
the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in OFF mode.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND 9-1-1 — IF EQUIPPED
If equipped, the overhead console contains an ASSIST and
a 9-1-1 button.
7
Driver Assistance Call Buttons
1 — 9-1-1 Button
2 — Assist Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
318 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
9-1-1 Call
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the overhead console.
• The ASSIST and 9–1–1 features operate through the
Uconnect Access service. These buttons will only operate as long as your Uconnect Access service is active.
Refer to your Uconnect Radio Supplement for further
information.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow,
just push the Assist button and you’ll be connected to
someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional
fees may apply for Roadside Assistance.
• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support for
Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile features.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call system
initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the 9-1-1 Call
connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the overhead
console or press the cancellation button on the Device
Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the green
LED light on the overhead console off.
2. The LED light located on the Assist and 9-1-1 buttons in
the overhead console will turn green once you push
these buttons and will remain on until the call is ended.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit the
following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1 operator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 319
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from a 9-1-1
operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate
an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause
the 9-1-1 Call system to fail, never add aftermarket
equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or
modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s 9-1-1
Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator
may be able to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once
the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the
vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able
to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1
Call system will attempt to remain connected with the
9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the
connection.
(Continued)
7
320 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
• Ignoring the Assist and 9-1-1 buttons light could
mean you will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the
Assist and 9-1-1 buttons light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If
the air bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the ORC system immediately.
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The overhead console lights located on the Assist and
9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle Device Requires Service. Please Contact Your
Dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle Device
Requires Service. Please Contact Your Dealer.”
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
• The ignition key is in OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 321
• Operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or
obstructed.
NOTE:
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS antennas.
You could prevent operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data)
network and GPS signal reception, which can prevent
your vehicle from placing an emergency call. Operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal
reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
• Operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable
1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection.
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
7
322 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
BULB REPLACEMENT
General Information
• Before you replace a bulb, check the contacts to be sure
they are not oxidized.
• Replace the bulbs with the same type and wattage.
• After replacing a light bulb, always check the correct
orientation.
Replacement Bulbs
• Before replacing a bulb that is not functioning, check
that the fuse is intact.
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric
conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into
a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
Interior Bulbs
Lamps
Front Courtesy Light
Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors)
Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable roof)
Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable roof)
Interior Lights
Dome Light (Glove Compartment)
Bulb Number
C5W
C5W
C5W
C5W
W5W
W5W
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps
Bi-Xenon HID Headlamps
Bulb Number
(Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 323
Lamps
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps
Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL )
Front Direction Indicator Lamps
Front Fog Lamps
Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror)
Tail/Brake Lights/Turn Indicators
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Reverse
License Plate Lamp
Bulb Number
H13
P21/5W
PY21W
H11
WY5W
P21W
LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
W16W
W5W
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps
Hi/Lo Beam Light Halogen
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Open the engine compartment and remove the headlamp bulb cap.
Headlamp Bulb Cap
7
324 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Rotate the headlamp bulb socket counterclockwise then
pull outwards.
3. Push on the locking tab on the headlamp bulb connector
and remove the bulb and socket.
Headlamp Bulb Socket
Headlamp Bulb Connector
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 325
Position Lights/Daytime Running Lights/Fog Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Use a suitable tool to remove the access door.
7
Headlamp Bulb
4. Install the new headlamp bulb making sure it is properly locked.
5. Install the headlamp bulb and socket; turn it clockwise
making sure it is properly locked.
Position Light/Daytime Running Light/Fog Light Access
WARNING!
Carry out the operation of replacing lamps only with
the engine off. Also make sure that the engine is cold,
to avoid the danger of burns.
1 — Screws
2 — Access Door
326 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Remove the electrical connectors.
Position Light/Daytime Running Light Assembly
Electrical Connectors
4. Rotate in a counterclockwise direction (on the left-hand
socket) or in a clockwise direction (on the right-hand
socket) and remove the bulb and bulb socket.
1 — DRL Bulb Socket
2 — Turn Signal Bulb Socket
5. To replace the bulb gently push bulb and rotate counterclockwise.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 327
9. Reinstall the access door.
Front Fog Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Use a suitable tool to remove the access door.
7
Bulb and Socket Assembly
1 — Bulb
2 — Rotate Bulb
6. Insert the new bulb by pushing on it and turning it
clockwise. Make sure the bulb is correctly locked in
place.
7. Install the bulb and sockets and rotate them clockwise
(right side) and clockwise (left side), making sure that it
is properly locked.
8. Reconnect the electrical connectors.
Position Light/Daytime Running Light/Fog Light Access
1 — Screws
2 — Access Door
328 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. By pushing the electrical connector tab remove the
electrical connector.
7. Reinstall the access door.
Side Indicators
Front Side Indicators
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
1. Operating from inside the engine compartment using a
suitable tool release the retaining clip.
Fog Light Assembly
1 — Bulb Socket
2 — Electrical Connector
3 — Bulb
4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise, and then replace the
bulb.
5. Insert the new bulb in the socket, making sure the bulb
is locked into place.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
Lamp Retaining Clip
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 329
2. Remove lamp assembly by sliding it toward the outside.
3. Remove the electrical connector by pushing the tab then
disconnect the electrical connector.
7
Lamp Assembly
Electrical Connector
330 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Rotate counterclockwise to release the bulb socket from
the lamp assembly, and remove it.
Bulb
6. Insert the new bulb in the socket.
Bulb Socket
5. Remove the bulb from the socket.
7. Reinstall the bulb and socket into the lamp assembly by
turning it clockwise, making sure it is locked into place.
8. Reconnect the electrical connector.
9. Reinstall the lamp assembly on the car, making sure it is
locked into place.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 331
Side Indicators on External Rear View Mirrors – (If
Equipped)
CAUTION!
The procedure is described as a guideline. For the
replacement of the lamp it is recommended that you
contact your authorized dealer.
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
1. Remove the mirror cap on the outside rear view mirror.
7
Removing the mirror cap
Mirror Cap
332 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Remove the transparent lens assembly as shown.
Transparent Lens Assembly
Transparent Lens
3. Remove the bulb socket and bulb from the transparent
lens assembly by rotating the socket counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb from the bulb socket by pulling the
bulb straight out.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 333
Rear Tail Lamps
Contain the following:
• Position lights
• Stop lights
• Direction indicator
• REVERSE lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Using a suitable tool remove the door as shown.
Bulb And Socket Assembly
1 — Bulb
2 — Bulb Socket
5. Insert the new bulb, making sure that it is locked into
place.
6. Reinstall the socket in to the transparent lens assembly.
7. Reinstall the cover on the outside rear view mirror,
making sure it is locked into place.
Trim Panel Door
7
334 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Using a suitable tool remove fastener.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector by pushing the release.
Tail Lamp Removal
6. Unscrew the screws and remove the rear tail lamp
holder.
Rear Lamp Fastener and Electrical Connector
1 — Fastener
2 — Electrical Connector
5. Remove the rear tail lamp, sliding it toward the outside
as shown.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 335
7
Rear Lamp Assembly
1 — Mounting Screws
7. Replace the bulb as necessary.
Rear Tail Lamp Holder
1 — Tail Light
2 — Reverse Bulb
3 — Position Light/Stop Light/Turn Signal
8. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly locked.
9. Reassemble the lamp assembly on the rear tail lamp
housing, tightening the screws.
10. Reposition the rear tail lamp on the car.
11. Secure the fastener of the rear tail lamp and reconnect
the electrical connector.
336 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
12. Reinstall the door making sure of its correct locked.
13. Finally close the tailgate.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL is LED. For replacement see your authorized
dealer.
License Plate Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using a suitable tool remove the license plate lens.
License Plate Light
2. Remove the bulbs from the individual side contacts.
3. Insert the new bulbs, and ensure that they are properly
locked between the contacts.
4. Reinstall the license plate lens.
NOTE: If removal the license plate lens using a screwdriver, be sure to cover the tip of the screwdriver with a
cloth so no damage is done to the lenses or the vehicle
paint.
License Plate Light Location
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 337
Replacing Interior Bulbs
2. Release the retainer clips and bulb housing as shown.
Front Courtesy Light
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using a suitable tool remove the front courtesy light as
shown.
7
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
1 — Retaining Clips
2 — Bulb Housing
Front Courtesy Light Housing
338 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Replace the bulbs by pulling straight out of bulb housing.
Dome Light Vanity Mirror
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Lift the cover of the mirror and pull out the visor mirror
light cover.
2. Replace the bulb, releasing it from the side contacts, and
then insert the new bulb, making sure that it is properly
locked between the contacts.
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
4. Insert the new bulbs, making sure that they are properly
locked.
5. Reassemble the bulb housing and courtesy light housing
making sure that they are properly locked.
6. Install the front courtesy light making sure that it is
properly locked.
Visor
1 — Visor Mirror Cover
2 — Visor Mirror Light
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 339
3. Reinstall the visor mirror light cover making sure that it
is properly locked.
4. Finally lower the visor mirror cover to the mirror.
Rear Dome Light — Without Retractable Roof
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
Dome Light Glove Compartment
1. Using a suitable tool release the lamp assembly at both
the ends.
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
2. Open the flap and replace the bulb.
1. Open the glove compartment;
2. Place your fingers inside the light assembly, pull the
bulb to replace it.
7
Rear Dome Light Housing
1 — Bulb
2 — Flap
Bulb Removal/Installation
3. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is properly locked.
340 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the contacts.
2. Replace the bulb by removing it from the side contacts.
4. Reinstall the dome light.
Dome Light — MY SKY
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Lower the handle in the direction shown remove the
dome light.
Bulb
3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the contacts.
4. Reinstall the dome light.
Retractable Roof Light
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 341
Interior Cargo Lights
WARNING!
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Open the luggage compartment and remove the dome
light assembly.
2. Open the light cover and replace the bulb.
Light Cover
3. Close the light cover over the bulb.
4. Reinstall the dome light in its correct position.
• Before proceeding with the replacement of the lamp wait
for the exhaust pipes are cool: DANGER OF BURNS!
• Modifications or repair of the electrical system performed incorrectly and without taking into account
the technical characteristics can cause malfunctions
with the risk of fire.
• Halogen lamps contain gas under pressure, in the
event of breakage be careful of the projection of
fragments of glass.
• Halogen lamps must be handled by touching only
the metallic part. If the transparent bulb is in contact
with the fingers, reduces the intensity of the emitted
light and you can also affect the life of the lamp. In
case of accidental contact, rub the bulb with a cloth
dampened with alcohol and allow to dry.
7
342 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
When a device does not work, you must check the electrical circuit inside the fuse for a break/melt.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive current.
Also please be aware that when using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
1 — Electrical Circuit
2 — Blade Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit
3 — Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Circuit
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 343
Fuse Removal
Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution Unit
To replace a fuse use the extractor attached to the fuse
cover (located on the inside of the engine compartment
fuse cover.
The engine compartment fuse panel is located on the left
side of the engine compartment.
7
Engine Compartment Fuse Cavities
Fuse Extractor Location
Access To The Fuses
The fuses are grouped into four controllers located in the
engine compartment, under the instrument panel and on
the inside of the left side cargo trim panel.
344 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
• Properly secure the fuse cover to the box, slide completely from top to bottom.
• Fully depress the screw, using the special screwdriver
supplied.
• Slowly turn the screw clockwise.
• Release the screw.
Fuse Panel & Cover Location
1 — Mounting Screw
2 — Fuse Cover
Removing Fuse Cover and Locking Screw
Proceed as follows:
• Slowly turn the screw counterclockwise.
• Slowly release the screw.
• Remove the fuse cover by sliding it upward.
Mounting Fuse Cover and Locking Screw
Proceed as follows:
Battery Fuse Cover Location
1 — Fuse Cover Tabs
2 — Fuse Cover
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 345
Cavity
F01
Maxi Fuse
70 Amp Tan
Cartridge Fuse
–
Micro Fuse
–
F02
70 Amp Tan
–
–
F03
–
20 Amp Blue
–
F04
–
30 Amp Pink
–
F05
70 Amp Tan
–
–
F06
F07
–
–
–
–
F08
20 Amp Yellow
40 Amp Orange –
1.4 Without A/C
50 Amp Red – 1.4
With A/C And All
2.4 Models
–
30 Amp Pink
–
F09
–
–
5 Amp Tan
F10
–
–
15 Amp Blue
Description
Module Body Computer
Module Body Computer, Rear Distribution Units
Controller Power Supply Body Computer
Brake Control Electronics Module
Electric PowerAssisted Steering
Engine Cooling fan
Engine Cooling fan
Automatic Transmission, GSM
Control Module Engine
Horn
7
346 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
F11
Maxi Fuse
–
Cartridge Fuse
–
F14
F14
–
–
–
–
Micro Fuse
10 Amp Red – 1.4
Engines
25 Amp Clear – 2.4
Engines
7.5 Amp Brown
5 Amp Tan
F15
40 Amp Orange
–
–
F16
–
–
5 Amp Tan
F17
–
–
F18
–
–
10 Amp Red – 1.4
Engines
15 Amp Blue – 2.4
Engines
20 Amp Yellow
F19
–
–
7.5 Amp Brown
Description
Supply Secondary
Loads
Heater ⬙Blow By⬙
Pump Power ⬙After
Run⬙
Brake Control Module Pump
Engine Control Module Power, Automatic
Transmission
Supply Primary
Loads
12V Rear Cargo Outlet Ignition Powered
Air Conditioner
Compressor
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 347
Cavity
F20
Maxi Fuse
–
Cartridge Fuse
–
Micro Fuse
5 Amp Tan
F21
F22
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
F23
–
–
30 Amp Green
F24
–
–
15 Amp Blue
F30
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
(Customer Installed)
F83
F84
–
–
40 Amp Green
–
–
30 Amp Green
F87
–
–
5 Amp Tan
F88
F89
F90
–
–
–
–
–
–
7.5 Amp Brown
30 Amp Green
5 Amp Tan
Description
Electronic Power
Four-Wheel Drive
Fuel Pump
Power Control Module Engine
Heated Windshield –
If Equipped
Electronic Unit Supply Automatic Transmission
12V Rear Cargo Outlet Constant Battery
Powered
Air Conditioning Fan
Power Supply All
Wheel Drive
Gear Selector Automatic Transmission
Heated Outside Mirrors
Heated Rear Window
IBS Sensor (Battery
State Of Charge)
7
348 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Body Computer Fuse Center
The controller is located at the left side of the steering
column at the bottom of the instrument panel.
For the fuse replacement see your authorized dealer.
Body Controller Fuse Cavities
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 349
Cavity
F31
Mini Fuse
7.5 Amp Brown
F33
F34
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
F36
15 Amp Blue
F37
10 Amp Red
F38
F42
F43
F47
F48
F49
20 Amp Yellow
7.5 Amp Brown
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
7.5 Amp Brown
F50
7.5 Amp Brown
Description
Flashes/Electrical Movement Front
Seats/Fan Air Conditioning
Power Window Front (Driver Side)
Power Window Front (Passenger
Side)
Supply Uconnect System, Air Conditioning, Alarm, Power Folding Outside Mirrors, USB Port
System Power Forward Collision
Warning Plus, All Wheel Drive
(AWD), IPC
Central Locking
Power Under Lock and Key
Bi-directional Pump Washer
Power Rear Window (Driver Side)
Power Rear Window (Passenger Side)
Supply ParkSense, Spot Lights Front
Dome, Mirror, Electric Motor Retractable Roof, Heated Front Seats, Stabilizer Battery, ESC System, ESL
Supply Air Bag
7
350 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
F51
Mini Fuse
7.5 Amp Brown
F53
7.5 Amp Brown
F94
15 Amp Blue
Description
Alarm Power, Front Courtesy Light,
Air Conditioning Compressor, Brake
Pedal Switch (NC), Plaque Automatic
Transmission, Compass, Rear Camera, Leveling Headlights, Air Conditioning
Supply IPC/Starter Device/System
Keyless Enter-N-Go
Power Socket
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 351
Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit
To access the fuses, remove the access door from the left
rear panel of the rear cargo area.
The fuses may be contained in two units. fuse holder No. 1
is located closest to the rear of the vehicle and fuse holder
No. 2 (if equipped with trailer towing) is located closest to
the front of the vehicle.
7
Rear Cargo Fuse Cavities
1 — Fuse Holder No. 1
2 — Fuse Holder No. 2
Fuse Holder No. 1
Cavity
F1
F2
F3
F4
Mini Fuse
30 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
7.5 Amp Brown
Description
Power Inverter
HIFI Audio System
MY SKY
Lumbar Adjustment Front Seat
(Driver Side)
352 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
F5
F6
Mini Fuse
30 Amp Green
7.5 Amp Brown
F7
30 Amp Green
F8
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Power Seat (Driver Side)
Power Seat (Driver Side And Passenger Side)
Lumbar Adjustment Front Seats
(Driver Side And Passenger Side)
Heating Front Seats
On the controller there is also a 20 amp fuse for the sun
visor of the retractable roof.
Fuse Holder No. 2
Cavity
F1
Mini Fuse
10 Amp Red
F5
15 Amp Blue
F6
15 Amp Blue
Description
Controller Exterior Lighting On
Trailer
Controller Exterior Lighting Lights
(Drivers Side)
Controller Exterior Lighting Lights
(Passenger Side)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 353
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and tools are located in the rear storage compartment if equipped, inside a special container.
7
Jack And Tools
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
Wheel Bolt Wrench
Jack
Emergency Funnel
Wheel Chocks
Screwdriver
Emergency Allen Key
354 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor pull strap.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Load Floor Pull Strap
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
4. Remove the chocks.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
5. Remove the jack and wheel bolt wrench.
6. Remove the spare tire.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE (manual transmission).
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 355
5. Turn the ignition off to the OFF position.
WARNING! (Continued)
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right front
tire, chock the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in
the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
• Apply the parking brake and place an automatic
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
7
356 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the wheel
with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise
one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the jacking location that is
closest to the flat tire. Jacking location is indicated by a
stamped arrow on the body. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of
the sill flange, centering the jack saddle inside the cutout
in the sill cladding.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.
2. If equipped with wheels where the center cap covers the
wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench to pry the center
cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
Jacking Locations
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 357
7
Front Jacking Location
Front Jacking Engagement Point
358 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Engagement Point
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 359
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact spare
tire or a limited — use spare tire. For further information refer to “Tires — General Information” in “Servicing And Maintenance”.
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel
bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
Mounting Spare Tire
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
7
360 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
“Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifications”
for the proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
station.
Road Tire Installation
11. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks, and flat tire.
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded end
of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
Properly Stowed Tire
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 361
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
“Torque Specifications” in the “Technical Specifications”
section for the proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about
the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel chocks.
Stow the jack and tools back in the proper storage
location. Release the Electric Park Brake before driving
the vehicle.
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque with
a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located in the rear storage compartment inside a storage container. Located inside the container are a screwdriver and the emergency fuel funnel. To
access the Tire Service Kit open the liftgate and remove the
load floor.
7
Tire Service Kit Components
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Power Plug (located on bottom side of Tire Service Kit)
Sealant Hose (Clear)
Power Button
Pressure Gauge
Warning Label
362 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If a tire is punctured, you can make a first emergency repair
using the Tire Service Kit located in the rear storage
compartment inside the storage container.
1. Remove the Tire Service Kit from the vehicle, take it out
from the bag and place it near the punctured tire. Screw
the clear flexible filling tube to the tire valve.
2. Insert the power plug into the vehicle power outlet
socket. Start the vehicle engine.
3. Push the Tire Service Kit power button to the “I”
position. The electric compressor will be turned on,
sealant and air will inflate the tire.
Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure should be reached within
20 minutes. If the pressure has not been reached turn off and
remove the Tire Service Kit, drive the vehicle 30 feet (10 meters)
back and forth, to better distribute the sealant inside the tire.
4. Attach the clear flexible filling tube of the compressor
directly to the tire valve and repeat the inflation process.
When the correct pressure has been reached, start driving
the vehicle to uniformly distribute the sealant inside the
tire. After 10 minutes, stop and check the tire pressure. If
the pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not drive the
vehicle, as the tire is too damaged, contact the nearest
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have
the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 65 mph (110 km/h) until
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you. Have
the tire checked as soon as possible at an authorized
dealer.
If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or above repeat the
inflation process to reach the correct tire pressure and
continue driving.
5. Peel off the warning label from the bottle and place it on
the dashboard as a reminder to the driver that the tire
has been treated with Tire Service Kit.
WARNING!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot
after use, so it should be handled carefully.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 363
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service
Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the
wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
(Continued)
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty
of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do
not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
7
364 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Replacing The Sealant
JUMP STARTING
NOTE: Replace the sealant canister prior to the expiration
date at your authorized dealer.
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump
starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
WARNING!
Store the sealant canister in its special compartment,
away from sources of heat. Failure to follow this
WARNING may result in sealant canister rupture and
serious injury or death.
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
or electrical system may occur.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 365
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
Proceed as follows:
Battery Posts
1 — Positive Battery Post
2 — Negative Battery Post
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive
battery post.
1. Apply the Electric Park Brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK (manual transmission in NEUTRAL)
and place the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
7
366 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from
the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 367
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The fuel filling procedure in case of emergency is described
in the “Emergency Refueling Procedure”. Refer to “Adding
Fuel” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating your engine by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, put transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over
and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
7
368 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following
procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
3. Carefully separate the gear selector bezel and boot
assembly from the center console.
Gear Selector Bezel Location
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 369
7
Gear Selector Override Location
1 — Gear Selector Override Access Hole
Removing Gear Selector Bezel
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
6. Move the Gear Selector to the NEUTRAL position.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into the
gear selector override access hole (at the right front
corner of the gear selector assembly), and push and hold
the override release lever down.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector bezel.
370 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission, push
and hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then shift
back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or SECOND GEAR and REVERSE
(with manual transmission), while gently pressing the
accelerator.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels
or racing the engine.
For Vehicles With Automatic Transmission:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved
at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the
transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE
or REVERSE.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch (if necessary), to place
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙
mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control” in “Safety” for further information. Once
the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again
to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
(Continued)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 371
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
for at least one minute after every five rockingmotion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE/ SECOND gear and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
(Continued)
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift Or
Dolly Tow
Flatbed
Wheels OFF
The Ground
NONE
Rear
Front
ALL
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
FWD MODELS
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
7
372 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
NOTE:
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
• Vehicles with a discharged battery or total electrical
failure when the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is engaged,
will need a wheel dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels
off the ground when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is
disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent
Electric Park Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake
feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle must
towed with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
towing dolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels
raised).
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the RUN mode.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK so
that the vehicle can be moved.
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground on a flatbed.
NOTE: Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and
remains released, while being towed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 373
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
on a flatbed, or with one end of the vehicle raised and the
opposite end on a towing dolly.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage
to the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on
the ground. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission or power transfer unit
will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the vehicle.
The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
7
Front Tow Hook Locations
374 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING! (Continued)
Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious
injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
Rear Tow Hook Location
Place the ignition in the RUN and subsequently on ON,
without opening the door. During towing remember that
not having the aid of the power brakes and the electromechanical power steering, greater force is needed in applying the brakes and steering of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains
may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.
(Continued)
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) function.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 375
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
7
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SCHEDULED SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
▫ Maintenance Plan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
▫ 1.4L Turbo Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
▫ 2.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
▫ Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . .405
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . .405
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
䡵 RAISING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
䡵 TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
▫ Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
8
378 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
▫ Tire Chains (Traction Devices) . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
▫ Protection From Atmospheric Agents . . . . . . . .432
▫ Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Body And Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .433
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
▫ Preserving The Bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
䡵 STORING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
䡵 BODYWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
䡵 INTERIORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Seats And Fabric Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Plastic And Coated Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
▫ Leather Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
▫ Glass Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 379
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Severe Duty All Models
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate in the instrument cluster.
This means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer
tow and extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500
miles (805 km).
NOTE: The Oil Change Indicator will not illuminate under
these conditions.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), one year or 350 hours
of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of
engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet
customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and brake
master cylinder reservoir, and fill as needed.
8
380 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Plan
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
Check and adjust hand brake.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air filter if using in dusty or off-road
conditions.
Required Maintenance Intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Check tire condition/wear and
adjust pressure, if necessary,
check Tire Service Kit expiration
date (if equipped).
10,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
16,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
Refer to the “Maintenance Chart” on the following page for
the required maintenance intervals.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Check operation of lighting system (headlamps, direction indicators, hazard warning lights,
luggage compartment, passenger compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel
warning lights, etc.).
Check and, if necessary, top up
fluid levels (brakes/hydraulic
clutch, windshield washer, battery, engine coolant, etc.).
Check engine control system
operation (via diagnostic tool).
Visually inspect condition of:
exterior bodywork, underbody
protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel system - brakes),
rubber elements (boots,
sleeves, bushings, etc.).
1
32,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
10,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
16,000
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 381
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
8
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check windshield/rear window
wiper blade position/wear.
Check operation of windshield
washer system and adjust jets if
necessary.
Check cleanliness of hood and
tailgate locks and cleanliness
and lubrication of linkages.
Visually check the condition and
wear of the front and rear
brakes.
Check the front suspension, tie
rods, CV joints and replace if
necessary.
Visual inspect the condition of
the accessory drive belt.
Check the tension of the accessory drive belt.
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
10,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
16,000
382 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect and replace, if required,
front end accessory drive belt,
tensioner, and, idler pulley.
Inspect and replace PCV valve
if necessary.
Change engine oil and replace
oil filter.*
Inspect the PTU fluid level.
Inspect the rear differential fluid
level.
Replace spark plugs (1.4L
Turbo engine). **
Replace spark plugs (2.4L engine). **
Replace engine air filter. #
Replace brake fluid every two
years. ***
Replace cabin filter.
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
10,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
16,000
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 383
•
•
8
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
○
•
•
•
○
•
•
•
○
•
•
○
•
•
○
•
•
○
•
•
○
•
○
Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle
for any of the following: trailer
towing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert
operation or more than 50% of
your driving is at sustained
speeds during hot weather,
above 90°F (32°C).
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) whichever
comes first.
Replace the timing belt (1.4L
Turbo Engine).
䡩 Recommend replacement
• Mandatory service
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
10,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
16,000
384 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
•
•
•
•
•
# The engine air cleaner should be inspected at every oil
change if used in dusty areas.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 385
* The oil and oil filter replacement must be carried out
when indicated by a warning light or message on the
instrument panel, or in any case should not exceed 1 year
or 10,000 miles (16,000 km).
** The spark plug change is distance based only, yearly
intervals do not apply. The following are essential to ensure
correct operation and prevent serious damage to the engine:
• Only use spark plugs of the same make and type which
are specially certified for such engines (refer to “Fluids
and Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further
information).
• Strictly comply with the spark plug replacement interval
given in the “Maintenance Schedule” for spark plug
replacement.
• Contact your authorized dealer if you have any questions.
*** The brake fluid change interval is time based only,
mileage intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
8
386 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1.4L Turbo Engine
1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
4 — Battery
5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
7 — Coolant Pressure Bottle Cap
8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle
9 — Oil Fill Cap
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 387
2.4L Engine
8
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Fill Cap
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
4 — Battery
5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
7 — Coolant Pressure Bottle Cap
8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
388 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is approximately five minutes
after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil
level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give
you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, and
approximately five minutes after a fully warmed engine is
shut off, will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the
dipstick. The safe range is indicated by a crosshatch zone.
Adding 1 quart (0.9 Liters) of oil when the reading is at the
low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at
the full end of the indicator range.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the
engine with oil will cause oil aeration, which can lead to
loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature.
This loss of oil pressure and increased oil temperature
could damage your engine.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• Turn vehicle off and disconnect the fan motor lead
before working near the radiator cooling fan.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to
the OFF position. The fan is temperature controlled
and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
(Continued)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 389
WARNING! (Continued)
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and
refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the
front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment, and the fluid level should be checked
at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze). Refer to
“Engine Compartment” in this section for further information.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
8
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump-Starting
Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
(Continued)
390 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include
detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these
Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is approximately five minutes
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 391
after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil
level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give
you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, and
approximately five minutes after a fully warmed engine is
shut off, will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the
dipstick. The safe range is indicated by a crosshatch zone.
Adding 1 quart (0.9 Liters) of oil when the reading is at the
low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at
the full end of the indicator range.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 12 months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection — 1.4L Turbo Engine
For best performance and maximum protection for turbocharged engines under all types of operating conditions,
the manufacturer recommends synthetic engine oils that
are API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-12991.
Engine Oil Selection — 2.4L Engine
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the
engine with oil will cause oil aeration, which can lead
to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This loss of oil pressure and increased oil temperature could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil — Gasoline Engine
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends 0W-20 engine oils that are API Certified and
meet the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 1.4L Turbo
Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-40 synthetic engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-12991 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix
or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
and vehicle fuel economy.
8
392 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L Engine
Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This
engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in this section.
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters
and are recommended.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 393
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
NOTE:
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable
and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to the Warranty Information
Book for further warranty information.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable
and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under
high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair
requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an
experienced technician.
8
394 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
See your authorized dealer for service.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 395
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
The Service Position command can be repeated several
times to bring the blades into the desired position, up to a
maximum of three times.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
After three subsequent activations the strategy is disabled.
Service Position Strategy
• Number of subsequent activations is three.
The service position allows the wiper blades to be placed in
a position that allows the wiper blades to be easily
changed.
• Two minutes timer has expired after turning the ignition
OFF.
To enable the Service Position Strategy, the wipers must be
in the Park position before placing the ignition in the
STOP/OFF position.
Function Deactivation:
The functionality is reset if:
• The ignition is turned to the MAR/RUN position.
NOTE: When turning the ignition ON, the blades will go
into the parking position.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
Service mode must be activated within two minutes after
the ignition is placed in the STOP/OFF position.
1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade
off of the windshield.
To have a correct activation of strategy, the Service Position
command (antipanic) must be active for at least half a
second.
2. Push the release button on the arm of the wiper blade.
At every valid activation of Service Position command, the
wiper blades are activated for 250 ms.
3. Push the wiper blade up and remove it.
8
396 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. Grab and hold the wiper arm closest to the wiper blade
end while pushing the wiper blade towards the liftgate
glass to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade
holder on the wiper arm.
3. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly push the
wiper blade until it snaps into place.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Button
3 — Wiper Arm
4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the wiper blade
until it snaps into place.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Carefully lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the
wiper blade off of the liftgate glass.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 397
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
(Continued)
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
8
398 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in
gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• Turn vehicle off and disconnect the fan motor lead
before working near the radiator cooling fan.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to
the OFF position. The fan is temperature controlled
and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and
refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the
front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 399
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
Selection Of Coolant
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
8
400 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact your authorized dealer
for assistance.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 401
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
NOTE:
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact your local
authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
8
402 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Points To Remember
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,
do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the engine off and cold, the level of the coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the “MAX” and
“MIN” lines marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain
the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle.
Do not overfill.
See your authorized dealer for service
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 403
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. Riding the brakes may also reduce
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the “Brake Warning Light” is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid
level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked when
the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be
caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
8
404 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both the
brake system and the clutch release system. The two
systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in one
system will not affect the other system. The manual
transmission clutch release system should not require fluid
replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the brake fluid
reservoir is low and the brake system does not indicate any
leaks or other problems, it may be a result of a leak in the
hydraulic clutch release system. See your local authorized
dealer for service.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in the “Technical Specifications” section for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in the “Technical
Specifications” section for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely
damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch
system performance. Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transmission.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 405
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Lubricant Selection
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the bottom
of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubricant has become contaminated with water.
NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
changed immediately.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
8
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for fluid specifications.
406 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check
your transmission fluid level using special service tools. If
you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit
your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage
may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools
to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 407
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to
your authorized dealer or service station.
The lifting points on the vehicle are marked on side skirts
with symbols (
see example shown).
8
Lifting Point Locations
408 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRES
Tire Markings
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 409
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
Tire Sizing Chart
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
8
410 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
EXAMPLE:
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 411
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards
and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the
tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
8
412 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 413
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
8
414 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 415
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
8
416 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 417
Tires — General Information
WARNING! (Continued)
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
(Continued)
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
8
418 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fuel Economy
CAUTION!
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
judgement when determining proper
may look properly inflated even when
inflated.
a good quality
make a visual
inflation. Tires
they are under-
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 419
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
8
420 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 421
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance
schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
8
422 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer
or original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can
cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering
and suspension components. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
(Continued)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 423
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure
adversely affect the safety and handling of
designation or
sidewall. Use
to do so may
your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
8
424 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Snow Tires
Spare Tires — If Equipped
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 425
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
8
426 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
These products and automatic car washes may damage
the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is not
(Continued)
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 427
CAUTION! (Continued)
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only
car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor or
Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
8
428 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• Install on front tires only.
• Due to limited clearance, the following traction devices
are recommended:
All Models:
• The use of 7mm tire chains is permitted with the use of
215/65R16 and 215/60R17 tires only. Front tires ONLY.
• Original equipment 215/65R17 (trailhawk tires), 225/
55R18 tire sizes are NOT chainable.
CAUTION!
• Use on front tires ONLY.
• Damage may result if tire chains or traction devices
are used with original equipment size tires.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 429
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation method
is the “forward cross” shown in the following diagram.
This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional
tires that must not be reversed.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Tire Rotation
8
430 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire rotation
method is the “rearward cross” shown in the following
diagram.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire Rotation
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to
the power transfer unit. Tire rotation schedule should
be followed to balance tire wear.
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 431
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of
the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If the vehicle should remain stationary for more than a
month, observe the following precautions:
• Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and possibly airy
location the windows open slightly.
• Check that the Electric Park Brake is not engaged.
• Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the battery
post and be sure that the battery is fully charged. During
storage check battery charge quarterly.
8
432 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• If you do not disconnect the battery from the electrical
system, check the battery charge every thirty days.
• Clean and protect the painted parts by applying protective waxes.
NOTE: When the vehicle has not been started or driven for
at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is
required to start the vehicle. Refer to “Starting The Engine”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
• Clean and protect polished metal parts by applying
protective waxes.
CAUTION!
• Apply talcum powder to the front and rear wiper blades
and leave raised from the glass.
Before removal of the positive and negative terminals
to the battery, wait at least a minute with ignition
switch in the OFF position and close the drivers door.
When reconnecting the positive and negative terminals
to the battery be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
position and the drivers door is closed.
• Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover taking care
not to damage the painted surface by dragging across
dirty surfaces. Do not use plastic sheeting which will not
allow the evaporation of moisture present on the surface
of the vehicle.
• Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar)
higher than recommended on the tire placard and check
it periodically.
• Do not drain the engine cooling system.
• Whenever you leave the vehicle is stationary for two
weeks or more, idle the engine for approximately five
minutes with the air conditioning system on and high
fan speed. This will ensure a proper lubrication of the
system, thus minimizing the possibility of damage to the
compressor when the vehicle is put back into operation.
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 433
cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road
dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
What Causes Corrosion?
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Preserving The Bodywork
The most common causes are:
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Washing
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
8
434 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
damage can also weaken the fabric.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 435
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
Plastic And Coated Parts
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
(Continued)
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
8
436 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
NOTE: If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer
more so than darker colors. The leather is designed to for
easy cleaning, and FCA recommends Mopar total care
leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats
as needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles. . . . . . . . .442
▫ Chassis Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications . . . . . .442
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .439
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
▫ 1.4L Turbo Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
▫ 2.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
䡵 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
9
438 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
Chassis Number
The chassis number (VIN) is stamped on a plate located on
the left front corner of the instrument panel cover, which is
visible from outside the car through the windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
A — Cover
BRAKE SYSTEM
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This number is also stamped on the floor of the passenger
compartment, near the right front seat.
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and
potential activation of the “Brake System Warning Light.”
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 439
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the brakes
will still function. However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required with the
power system operating.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Wheel Bolt Torque
89 Ft-Lbs (120 N·m)
**Wheel Bolt
Size
M12 x 1.25
Wheel Bolt
Socket Size
17 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Wheel Mounting Surface
9
440 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each bolt has
been tightened twice.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
1.4L Turbo Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emission regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance
when using high-quality unleaded
⬙regular⬙ gasoline having an octane rating of 87 using the (R+M)/2 method.
For optimum performance and fuel
economy the use of 91 octane or higher is recommended.
WARNING!
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel bolt torque to be sure
that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 441
2.4L Engine
All available gasoline engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations
and provide excellent fuel economy and
performance when using high quality
unleaded “regular” gasoline having a
octane rating of 87 using the (R+M)/2
method. The use of premium gasoline is
not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over
regular gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning
gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated
gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to
reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly
blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if
a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
9
442 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
Materials Added To Fuel
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion, and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed
natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in
MMT In Gasoline
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 443
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When available, the usage of Top Tier Detergent
gasoline
is
recommended.
Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish
removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients.
These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
9
444 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
FLUID CAPACITIES
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
(Continued)
U.S
Fuel (Approximate)
1.4L Turbo/2.4L Engine
Engine Oil With Filter
1.4L Turbo Engine (SAE 5W-40 Synthetic, API Certified)
2.4L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified)
Cooling System *
1.4L Turbo Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula)
Metric
12.7 Gallons
48 Liters
4.0 Quarts
5.5 Quarts
3.8 Liters
5.2 Liters
5.5 Quarts
5.2 Liters
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 445
U.S
2.4L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
6.8 Quarts
150,000 Mile Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
6.5 Liters
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 1.4L Turbo Engine
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend you use SAE 5W-40 API Certified Synthetic
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-12991 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell
Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine
Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to
your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
9
446 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection – 1.4L Turbo Engine
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
91 Octane Recommended, 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15%
Ethanol
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol
Chassis
Component
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped
Rear Differential (RDM) – If Equipped
Brake Master Cylinder
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar C Series Manual & Dual
Dry Clutch Transmission Fluid.
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid
may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
We recommended you use Mopar Front Axle/PTU Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).
We recommended you use Mopar Rear Axle/RDM Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 4. If DOT 4 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 3 is acceptable.
DOT 4 brake fluid must be changed every 2 years regardless of mileage.
MULTIMEDIA
CONTENTS
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . . .483
䡵 CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 5.0
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 6.5
NAV Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
䡵 USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . . .482
▫ Radio Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .483
▫ Introducing Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Basic Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
▫ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Navigation (6.5 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Uconnect Access* (6.5/6.5 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ Registration (6.5/6.5 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Mobile App (6.5 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
10
448 MULTIMEDIA
▫ Voice Texting (6.5 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Yelp (6.5 NAV). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (6.5 NAV). . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT RADIOS
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio, refer
to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
449
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
10
450 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/softwareupdate to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allow you to access and
change the customer programmable features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons
On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
MULTIMEDIA
451
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a setting
(i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have screen off and back
buttons located below the Uconnect system.
Push the screen off button to turn off the Uconnect touchscreen. Push the screen off button a second time to turn the
touchscreen on.
Push the back button to exit out of a menu or certain option
on the Uconnect system.
Uconnect 6.5 NAV Buttons On The Touchscreen And
Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument
panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect
display.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 5.0
Settings
Push the MORE button on the faceplate, then press the
“Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the settings
menu screen. In this mode, the Uconnect system allows
you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Clock, Safety/Assistance,
10
452 MULTIMEDIA
Lights, Doors & Locks, Engine Off Options, Compass
Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, Radio Setup, Restore
Settings and Clear Personal Data.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Display Mode
Brightness
Add Display Brightness With Headlights ON
Add Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
Language
Touchscreen Beep
the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen or the Back
button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu or
press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on
the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in
the “RUN” position.
Selectable Options
Auto
+
English
Manual
–
Español
Français
MULTIMEDIA
453
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the instrument cluster display. The following selectable
units of measure are listed below:
Setting Name
Units
Selectable Options
Metric
US
Custom
After pressing the “Custom” button with “Units” on the
touchscreen, you may select from the following menu
items:
Setting Name
Distance
Fuel Consumption
Pressure
Temperature
Selectable Options
mi
km
L/100 km
MPG (US)
psi
kPa
°C
km/L
bar
°F
10
454 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Voice Response Length
Show Command List
Selectable Options
Brief
Always
Detailed
With Help
Never
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Set Time
Set Format
Selectable Options
+
12 hour
24 hour
NOTE: Press the corresponding arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then select “AM” or “PM.”
Show Time Status
ON
OFF
Set Date
Up Arrow Button
Down Arrow Button
Sync Time — If Equipped
ON
OFF
NOTE: When in this display, you may sync the time with GPS.
MULTIMEDIA
455
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
ParkView Backup Camera
— If Equipped
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE: When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited
and the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned on), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to ten seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the
ignition is switched to the off position.
ParkView Backup Camera
On
Off
On/Off — If Equipped
ParkView Backup Camera
On
Off
Delay — If Equipped
ParkView Backup Camera
On
Off
Active Guide Lines — If
Equipped
NOTE: When this feature is enabled, active (dynamic) grid lines are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to
illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back up path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
10
456 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
ParkView Backup Camera
Fixed Guide Lines — If
Equipped
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE: When this feature is enabled, fixed (static) grid lines are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
Forward Collision
Near
Medium
Far
Warning-Plus (FCW+) —
If Equipped
NOTE: The Front Collision Warning (FCW+) feature can be set to Far, or set to Near. The default status of FCW+ is
the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when you
are farther away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change the setting for a more dynamic driving experience,
select the Near setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of
you.
Off
Only Warning
Warning + Active Braking
Forward Collision
Warning-Plus (FCW+) Active Braking — If
Equipped
NOTE: The FCW+ system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). When this feature is selected, it will apply the
brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision. The ABA applies additional brake pressure when
the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes active at
5 mph (8 km/h).
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
ParkSense — If Equipped
Sound Only
457
Selectable Options
Sounds And Display
NOTE: The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and Display.
Rear ParkSense Volume —
Low
Medium
High
If Equipped
NOTE: Rear Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected from the instrument cluster display or Uconnect System (if equipped). The chime volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and “HIGH.” The factory default volume
setting is MEDIUM.
Front ParkSense Volume
Low
Medium
High
— If Equipped
NOTE: Front Park Assist chime volume settings can be selected from the instrument cluster display or Uconnect System (if equipped). The chime volume settings include “LOW,” “MEDIUM,” and “HIGH.” The factory default volume
setting is MEDIUM.
Rear ParkSense Braking
On
Off
Assist — If Equipped
NOTE: When this feature is selected, the park assist system will detect objects located behind the vehicle and utilize
autonomous braking to stop the vehicle.
10
458 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
LaneSense Warning — If
Equipped
Early
Selectable Options
Medium
Late
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential lane departures.
LaneSense Strength — If
Low
Medium
High
Equipped
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
The amount of directional torque the steering system can apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.”
Blind Spot Alert — If
Off
Lights
Lights & Chime
Equipped
NOTE:
• When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime mode is activated,
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the
turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
• If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
Electric Park Brake Service
On
Off
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Mode — If Equipped
459
Selectable Options
NOTE: This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven
system, to command the electric park brake retraction, to service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers, rotors, etc.).
Rain Sensing Wiper — If
On
Off
Equipped
NOTE: Rain Sensing Auto Wipers when this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield
wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield.
Brakes — If Equipped
After pressing the “Brakes” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Brake Service — If Equipped
10
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE: This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven
system, to command the electric park brake retraction, to service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers, rotors, etc.).
Auto Park Brake — If Equipped
On
Off
460 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Headlight Sensitivity — If Equipped
Level 1
Selectable Options
Level 2
Level 3
NOTE:
• When this feature is selected, it allows the Headlight Sensitivity to be adjusted according to three levels.
• The greater the sensitivity set, the less the external light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting
on level 3 at sunset the headlights turn on earlier than in levels 1 and 2). To change the Headlight Sensitivity setting, press the “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen to select your desired Headlight Sensitivity level.
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
Greeting Lights — If
On
Off
Equipped
Automatic High
On
Off
Beam Headlamps —
If Equipped
Yes
No
Daytime Running
Lights — If
Equipped
NOTE: When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on while the engine is running.
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Cornering Lights —
If Equipped
461
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE: When this feature is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are on,
a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
Flash Lights With
On
Off
Lock — If Equipped
NOTE: When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn on Lock feature selected.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto Door Locks
10
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE: When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph
(20 km/h).
462 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Auto Unlock On Exit
— If Equipped
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE: When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened.
Flash Lights With
On
Off
Lock — If Equipped
NOTE: When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
key fob or the Passive Entry Feature.
Horn With Lock —
Off
1st Press
2nd Press
If Equipped
Horn With Remote
On
Off
Start — If Equipped
Passive Entry — If
On
Off
Equipped
NOTE: Passive Entry This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to press the key
fob lock or unlock buttons.
Remote Door
Driver
All
Unlock/Door Unlock
— If Equipped
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
463
Selectable Options
NOTE:
• When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button, you
must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When “All” is selected, all of the
doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button.
• If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If
“Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the
handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening once. If the driver door is opened, the interior
door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Headlight Off Delay
Selectable Options
+
–
NOTE: When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.
Radio Off Delay
0 MIN
20 MIN
10
464 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Paired Phones
Selectable Options
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Tune Start — If Equipped
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE: “Tune Start” begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one
of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that you will
miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip
Channel Skip
NOTE: SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Subscription Information
465
Selectable Options
Subscription Info
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and
is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Restore Settings
Ok
10
Selectable Options
Cancel
X
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their
default setting, press the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen. A pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
you want to reset your settings to default?”
466 MULTIMEDIA
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Clear Personal Data
OK
Selectable Options
Cancel
X
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data” button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
you want to clear all personal data?”
Restore Apps — If
OK
Cancel
X
Equipped
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it will reset Apps to their default settings. To remove restore apps, press the
“Restore Apps” button and a pop-up will appear.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 6.5
NAV Settings
NOTE:
Press the Settings button to display the menu setting
screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to
access programmable features that may be equipped such
as Display, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights,
Doors & Locks, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/
Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings Defaults, Clear
Personal Data and System Information.
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may
vary.
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
MULTIMEDIA
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press
the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Display Mode
467
previous menu, or press the “X” button on the touchscreen
to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down
Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow you
to toggle up or down through the available settings.
Selectable Options
Auto
Manual
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause the
radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control even though the headlights are on.
Display Brightness With Headlights
+
–
ON
Display Brightness With Headlights
+
–
OFF
Set Language
English/Español/Français
Touchscreen Beep
On
Off
10
468 MULTIMEDIA
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the instrument cluster display. The following selectable
units of measure are listed below:
Setting Name
Units
Selectable Options
Metric
US
Custom
After pressing the “Custom” button with “Units” on the
touchscreen, you may select from the following menu
items:
Setting Name
Distance
Fuel Consumption
Pressure
Temperature
Selectable Options
mi
km
L/100 km
MPG (US)
psi
kPa
°C
km/L
bar
°F
MULTIMEDIA
469
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Voice Response Length
Show Command List
Selectable Options
Brief
Always
Detailed
With Help
Never
Clock
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Show Time In Status Bar
Sync Time With GPS
Set Day
Set Month
Set Year
Set Hours
Set Minutes
Time Format
Selectable Options
On
On
+
+
+
+
+
12 hrs
Off
Off
–
–
–
–
–
24 hrs
10
470 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Forward Collision
Warning-Plus (FCW+) —
If Equipped
Near
Selectable Options
Medium
Far
NOTE: Forward Collision Warning-Plus (FCW+) — If Equipped The Front Collision Warning (FCW+) feature can be
set to Far, or Near. The default status of FCW+ is the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change
the setting for a more dynamic driving experience, select the Near setting. This warns you of a possible collision
when you are much closer to the vehicle in front of you.
Off
Only Warning
Warning + Active Braking
Forward Collision
Warning-Plus (FCW+) Active Braking — If
Equipped
NOTE: The FCW+ system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). When this feature is selected, it will apply the
brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision. The ABA applies additional brake pressure when
the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The ABA system becomes active at
5 mph (8 km/h).
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
LaneSense Warning — If
Equipped
Early
Selectable Options
Med
471
Late
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to provide either an “early,” “medium,” or “late” warning zone
start point.
LaneSense Strength — If
Low
Med
High
Equipped
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
The amount of directional torque the steering system can apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane departure can be set at “Low,” “Med” or “High.”
ParkSense — If Equipped
Sound Only
Sound & Display
NOTE: The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and Display.
10
472 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Rear ParkSense Volume —
If Equipped
Front ParkSense Volume
— If Equipped
Blind Spot Alert — If
Equipped
Low
Selectable Options
Medium
High
Low
Medium
High
Off
Lights
Lights & Chime
NOTE:
• When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode. When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime mode is activated,
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert when the
turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
• If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to specification.
ParkView Backup Camera
On
Off
Active Guidelines — If
Equipped
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
473
Selectable Options
NOTE: ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines — If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView
Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this
note will disappear.
ParkView Backup Camera
On
Off
Delay
NOTE: When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned off), the rear camera mode is exited
and the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned on), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to ten seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the
ignition is switched to the off position. To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the “MORE” button on the
faceplate, the “settings” button on the touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on the touchscreen.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
On
Off
— If Equipped
NOTE: Rain Sensing Auto Wipers When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield
wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield.
10
474 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Electric Park Brake Service
Mode — If Equipped
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE: This feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven
system, to command the electric park brake retraction, to service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers, rotors, etc.).
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Headlight Sensitivity — If Equipped
Selectable Options
1
2
3
NOTE:
The greater the sensitivity set, the less the external light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting on
level 3 at sunset the headlights turn on earlier than in levels 1 and 2).
• Level 1 = minimum sensitivity
• Level 2 = medium sensitivity
• Level 3 = maximum sensitivity
Headlight Off Delay
0
30
60
90
On
Off
Greeting Lights — If
Equipped
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Auto High Beams —
If Equipped
Daytime Running
Lights — If
Equipped
Cornering Lights —
If Equipped
Flash Lights With
Lock — If Equipped
Setting Name
Steering Directed Headlights — If
Equipped
475
Selectable Options
On
Off
Yes
No
On
Off
On
Off
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE: When this feature is selected, the headlights turn relative to a change in direction of the steering wheel.
10
476 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Auto Door Lock
Selectable Options
Yes
No
NOTE: When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit
Yes
No
Flash Lights With Lock — If
Yes
No
Equipped
Sound Horn With Remote Lock —
On
Off
If Equipped
Remote Door Unlock — If
All
Driver
Equipped
NOTE: This feature will allow you to program your remote door locks to open “All” or only the “Driver” with the
first push of the key fob or grabbing the Passive Entry door handle.
Passive Entry — If Equipped
On
Off
NOTE: This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles door(s) without having to press the key fob lock or
unlock buttons.
MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Sound Horn With Start — If
Equipped
477
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE: When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the Remote Start is activated.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Radio Off Delay
Headlight Off Delay — If Equipped
Selectable Options
0 MIN
+
20 MIN
–
NOTE: When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.
Audio
Setting Name
Balance/Fade
Equalizer
Selectable Options
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings.
+
–
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
10
478 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Speed Adjusted Volume
Surround Sound —
If Equipped
Loudness — If
Equipped
AUX Volume Offset
— If Equipped
Auto-On Radio
Selectable Options
OFF
1
2
3
On
Off
Yes
No
On
Off
On
Off
Recall Last
NOTE: The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition
off.
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Paired Phones
Paired Audio Sources
Selectable Options
This feature shows which mobile phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth
system.
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth
system.
MULTIMEDIA
479
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Tune Start — If Equipped
Selectable Options
On
Off
NOTE: “Tune Start” begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one
of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that you will
miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip
Channel Skip
NOTE: SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
10
480 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Name
Subscription Information
Selectable Options
Subscription Info
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and
is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings Defaults
After pressing the “Restore Settings Defaults” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Restore Settings
Selectable Options
When this feature is selected, it will reset Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio
Settings to their default. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting and make your selection.
MULTIMEDIA
481
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Clear Personal Data
Selectable Options
Yes
No
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it will remove personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets.
USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an external device to be plugged into
the USB port or AUX Jack.
10
Front USB Port And AUX Jack
1 — USB Port
2 — AUX Jack
482 MULTIMEDIA
Located below the heating ventilation and air conditioning
controls is the front USB port and AUX jack.
Refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
external USB support capability.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located at the rear of
the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the
switches.
Center Console USB Port
Located in the center console is a second USB port.
NOTE: Depending on vehicle configuration, the USB port
may be charge only, or media file capable.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
Center Console USB (Charge Only) Port — If Equipped
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
MULTIMEDIA
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
AUX/Media Player, etc.) and can also be used to select/
enter an item while scrolling through menu.
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand control is
different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
“Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.
483
current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it
is within eight seconds after the current track begins to
play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation when not
using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
Media Mode
USA/CANADA
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track
on the selected media (AUX/USB, Bluetooth). Pushing the
bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human body.
10
484 MULTIMEDIA
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
before turning on the wireless radio.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
1. Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
2. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician
for help.
MULTIMEDIA
485
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0 or 6.5 NAV
system.
Uconnect 6.5 NAV
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
Uconnect 5.0
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition.
10
486 MULTIMEDIA
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the
rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the
beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive
A Text
2 — Push To Begin Radio, Navigation, Or Media Functions
3 — Push To End Call
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session.
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
MULTIMEDIA
487
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 6.5 NAV
Radio
Uconnect 5.0
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM.
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1.
10
488 MULTIMEDIA
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
and say
to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button
“Help.” The system will provide you with a list of
commands.
Uconnect 6.5 NAV Radio
Media
Uconnect 5.0 Radio
Uconnect offers connections via USB Port, Bluetooth and
Auxiliary Ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and iPod devices. (Remote CD
player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth.
• Change source to iPod.
MULTIMEDIA
489
• Change source to USB.
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical.
TIP: For the Uconnect 5.0 and 6.5 NAV systems, press the
Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on
your iPod or USB device. Your Voice Command must
match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre
information is displayed.
Uconnect 6.5 NAV Media
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button
following commandsѧ
Uconnect 5.0 Media
. After the beep, say one of the
• Call John Smith.
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts.
10
490 MULTIMEDIA
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number).
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number).
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
button
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work.”
Uconnect 6.5 NAV Phone
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push the
Phone button
and say “Listen.” (Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
Phone button
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
MULTIMEDIA
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in traffic.
See you later.
Start without
No.
I’ll be late.
me.
I will be <5, 10,
Okay.
Where are you?
15, 20, 25, 30, 45,
Are you there
60>* minutes
Call me.
yet?
late.
See
you
in <5,
I need
I’ll call you later.
10,
15,
20,
25, 30,
directions.
45, 60>* of
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
minutes.
now.
I’m lost.
Thanks.
*Use only the numbers listed or the system may not
transpose the message.
491
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation
of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of
this
feature.
For
details
about
MAP,
visit
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports
reading incoming text messages only.
Navigation (6.5 NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
beep, say:
. After the
• For the 6.5 NAV Uconnect System, say: “Navigate to
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
10
492 MULTIMEDIA
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
. After
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
push the MORE button below the 6.5-inch touchscreen to
get started. Detailed registration instructions can be found
on the next page.
*Uconnect Access is available only on equipped vehicles
purchased within the continental United States, Alaska and
Hawaii. Services can only be used where coverage is
available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Uconnect 6.5 NAV Navigation
Uconnect Access* (6.5/6.5 NAV)
WARNING!
Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1 and
assist will NOT work without an operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G (data) network connection.
Security Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp Search
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance Call
MULTIMEDIA
493
***Extra charges apply.
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen to
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
wireless device or computer.
Registration (6.5/6.5 NAV)
For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.
1. Push the ASSIST button located in the overhead console.
Mobile App (6.5 NAV)
3G Wi-Fi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is equipped.
You’re only a few steps away from your Uconnect Acces
mobile app.
10
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your vehicle and handle all of the details.
Mobile App
494 MULTIMEDIA
To use the Uconnect Access Mobile App:
1. Download the Uconnect Access App from the App Store
or Google Play.
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy with
your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
2. Open the app and tap Create Account.
You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
to send a personalized text message.
3. Enter your email address and click Next.
TIP:
4. Once your email address is verified, enter a password
and full name to create an account.
• Not compatible with iPhone.
NOTE: Once you download the App to your compatible
mobile device, you will also be able to start your vehicle
and lock/unlock its doors from virtually anywhere. For
further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.
Voice Texting (6.5 NAV)
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After the
beep, say the following command: “Send message to
John Smith.”
2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the message
you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to process
your message.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
Yelp (6.5 NAV)
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
1. Push the MORE button on the faceplate.
2. Press the “Apps” button then the “All Apps” button on
the touchscreen.
3. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
4. Once the YELP home screen appears, push the VR
, then say: “YELP search.”
button
MULTIMEDIA
5. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like Uconnect
to find.
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
495
Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of
information right to your Uconnect 6.5 NAV system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• Show fuel prices.
• Show 5 - day weather forecast.
• Show extended weather.
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
10
Yelp
SiriusXM Travel Link (6.5 NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check
a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM
SiriusXM Travel Link
496 MULTIMEDIA
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select
media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean and will
respond back to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on
the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After
you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts
and music, get directions, read text messages and many
other useful requests.
Getting Started
Ensure Siri is enabled On Your iPhone.
1 — Select Settings On Your
iPhone
2 — Select General
3 — Select Siri
4 — Enable Siri
1. Pair your Siri enabled device to the vehicles sound
system.
MULTIMEDIA
497
• ⬙Read text message from Sarah⬙
• ⬙Take me to the nearest coffee shop⬙
NOTE:
• Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead to ensure your command is
understood.
• Siri is available on iPhone 4S and later.
General Information
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Phone Pick Up Button
2 — Voice Recognition/Siri Eyes Free Button
3 — Phone Hang Up Button
NOTE: A push and release of the
button will start
normal embedded VR functions. The push and hold,
button will start Siri functions.
then release of the
2. After the double beep, begin speaking to Siri.
Examples of Siri commands and questions:
• ⬙Play Rolling Stones⬙
• ⬙Send text message to John⬙
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
10
498 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Additional Information
© 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp
logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp.
For Uconnect system support, call: 1-877-855-8400 (24
hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com.
Uconnect Access services support, call: 1-855-792-4241
Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you
call.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .503
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center. . . . . . . . . . .501
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands. . . . . . . . . .501
11
500 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 501
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
11
502 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 503
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
11
504 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Owner’s Manuals
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
INDEX
12
506 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Adding Washer Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Adjust
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138, 248
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter). . . . . .393
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85, 394
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393, 394
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83, 393
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30, 140, 164
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399, 444
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147, 151, 157
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Audio Systems (Radio). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265, 405, 406
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406, 446
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
INDEX 507
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405, 446
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . . .115
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142, 389
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Keyless Key Fob Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Brake Control System, Electronic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403, 438
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386, 391, 392
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247, 444
Car Washes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353, 407
Chart, Tire Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .166
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .240
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
LATCH Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
12
508 INDEX
Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .234
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .231
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Cold Weather Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . . .481
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap). . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388, 398
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389, 398, 402
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . .399, 444, 445
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Cruise Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160, 163, 164
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Defroster, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Door Ajar Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
INDEX 509
Driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . . .115
Electric Park Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . .274
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . . .145
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . . .288
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353, 407
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Emission Control System Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .166
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388, 390
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388, 398
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247, 444
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390, 444, 445
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386, 391, 392
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391, 444
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Engine Oil Viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .374
Ethanol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247, 444
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247, 396
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55, 250
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85, 394
12
510 INDEX
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392, 445
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 161, 250
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Fluid Capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Fluid Leaks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Fluids And Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182, 190
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440, 445
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . .
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Select Lever Override. .
General Information. . . . . . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . .
Gross Axle Weight Rating. . .
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating .
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.441
.440
.441
.263
.368
.196
.436
.299
.298
.297
Hazard Warning Flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . . .56
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
INDEX 511
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . . . .56
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Holder, Coin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Hood Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52, 317
Instrument Cluster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142, 143, 152, 161
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Instrument Cluster Display
Information Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Interior And Instrument Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353, 355, 407
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . .23, 29
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . .21
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . .23
Key Fob, Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34, 476
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34, 476
Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Unlock From The Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
12
512 INDEX
Unlock From The Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Unlock Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Key, Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 29
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
LaneSense. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Latches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104, 106
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138, 248
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160, 163, 164
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . .153
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161, 162
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . .155, 197
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 161, 250
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . .143, 161
Loading Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
INDEX 513
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Locks
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Low Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .153, 166
Manual, Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262, 405
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Frequency Of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Mirrors
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52, 317
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440, 445
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390, 445
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388, 390
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392, 445
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391, 444
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391, 392, 444
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Oil Filter, Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
12
514 INDEX
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . .5, 504
Paint Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . . .413
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Power Seats
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap). . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 28, 30
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Recreational Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Reformulated Gasoline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
INDEX 515
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . .23, 29
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . . . .482
Remote Starting
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . . . . . .28
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 29
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Schedule, Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.247
.249
.503
.247
.408
.246
.379
. . . . . .212
. . . . . .214
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206, 247
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .212
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206, 207, 210
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 43
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41, 42, 43
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
12
516 INDEX
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30, 140
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Sentry Key
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 29
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Shifting
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 161, 250
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424, 425, 426
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26, 253
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
Steering
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .482
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . . .217
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173, 299
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . .
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.51
.83
.51
.58
INDEX 517
Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Tire And Loading Information Placard. . . . . . . . . . . .413
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249, 417, 424, 430
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353, 407
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417, 424
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353, 407
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413, 414
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408, 417
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424, 425, 426
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Tire Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Trailer Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Transfer Case
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265, 405
12
518 INDEX
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 161
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . . .481
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296, 414
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . .30
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89, 101
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Windows
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Wiper Blade Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2017 Renegade
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
2017
17BU-126-AC
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
OWNER’S MANUAL
Third Edition
Printed in the U.S.A.
Renegade
Download PDF
Similar pages